SENTRON communication manual

sentron Draft 2.10.02

Manual for the s

communication capable circuit breaker
SENTRON WL und SENTRON VL

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com
 Introduction and Overview
1
SENTRON WL
2
SENTRON VL
3
PROFIBUS Profile
SENTRON WL und SENTRON VL
4
Switch ES Power
5
Breaker Data Adapter (BDA)
Breaker Data Adapter Plus (BDA Plus)
6
Data Dictionary
7

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Safety guidelines
This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety, as well as to protect the
product and connected equipment. These notices are highlighted in the manual by a warning triangle and are mar-
ked as follows according to the level of danger.

Danger
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions are not
taken.

Warning
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper precautions are
not taken.

Caution
indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Attention
draws your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling the product, or to a particular
part of the documentation.

Qualified personnel
Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment. Qualified persons are defined as
persons who are authorized to commission, to ground, and to tag circuits, equipment, and systems in accordance
with established safety practices and standards.

Correct usage
Note the following:
Warning
This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalogue or the techni-
cal descriptions, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have
been approved or recommended by Siemens.
This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installed correctly,
and operated and maintained as recommended.
Brands
SIMATIC®, SIMATIC HMI®, SIMATIC NET® und SENTRON® are Brands of SIEMENS AG.
Some other designations used in these documents are also brands; the owner's rights may be violated if they
are used by third parties for their own purposes.

Copyright Siemens AG 2002 All rights reserved Disclaimer of liability

The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its con- We have checked this manual to ensure that its contents are correct
tents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders and applicable in relation to the hardware and software it describes.
will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by Despite all our endeavors, however, discrepancies cannot be wholly
patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved. excluded and so we cannot guarantee complete correctness and
applicability. However, the data in this manual are reviewed regularly
and any necessary corrections included in subsequent editions. Sug-
gestions for improvement are welcomed.

Technical Assistance: Telephone: +49 (0) 9131-7-43833 (8°° - 16°° MEZ) Fax: +49 (0) 9131-7-42899
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.siemens.de/lowvoltage/technical-assistance
Technical Support: Telephone: +49 (0) 180 50 50 222

Siemens AG
Bereich Automatisierungs- und Antriebstechnik
Geschäftsgebiet Niederspannungs-Schalttechnik Siemens AG 2002
D-91050 Erlangen Technical data subject to change without notice.

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com
PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com
 Introduction and Overview

Content of the Manual

Overview of the Bus Systems

Communication with circuit breaker

1
PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com
 Introduction and Overview
General

This manual is aimed at those who want to find out more about the Introduction

different applications of communications-capable circuit-breakers in The demands regarding

communications-capable systems, data
power distribution systems. It contains a detailed guide to commissioning, transparency, and flexibility in industrial
automation systems are growing all the
operating, diagnosing, and maintaining the new communications-capable time. Bus systems and intelligent
SENTRON WL and SENTRON VL circuit-breakers. switchgear are vital to ensure that
industrial switchgear systems can meet
these demands, since industrial
Content of the Manual SENTRON WL and SENTRON VL are the production and building management
Chapter 1 contains a short first circuit-breakers that can be are now inconceivable without
introduction to communication in parameterized, diagnosed, and communication technology.
power distribution systems, and maintained remotely without the use The ever-more stringent requirements
provides an overview of the benefits of field bus systems and higher-level regarding the electrical and mechanical
and applications of communications- operator control and monitoring aspects of circuit-breakers, the growing
capable circuit-breakers. The chapter systems. These procedures are carried need for flexibility and efficiency, and
concludes with a short description of out using the breaker data adapter increasing process rationalization and
the most important bus systems. (BDA), a state-of-the-art Internet- automation have contributed to the
capable parameterization device for recent major innovations in
Chapter 2 contains a detailed circuit-breakers, which is described in circuit-breaker technology. In power
description of the open, Chapter 6. distribution systems, the new, open,
communications-capable SENTRON communications-capable SENTRON WL
WL circuit-breaker. It includes The core component of SENTRON
circuit-breakers is the shared data circuit-breaker and the molded-case
information on the ordering and SENTRON VL circuit-breaker use bus
configuration data, and provides dictionary. This describes all the
available data points (status, systems to transmit key information for
commissioning instructions. diagnosis, malfunction, commissioning,
measured values, parameters, and so
Chapter 3 contains the same on), including formats and scaling and burden center management to a
information, but this time on the factors. Chapter 7 contains an central control room. The wide range of
molded-case communications- easy-to-understand description of the applications ensure that these
capable SENTRON VL circuit-breaker. data dictionary. circuit-breakers are more than just
Chapter 4 explains how the SENTRON simple switching and protection
Chapter 8 concludes this manual with devices.
circuit-breakers are integrated in a a description of the typical
PROFIBUS-DP system, and describes End-to-end communication, as well as
applications for communications- data entry, transmission, analysis, and
the joint profile of both circuit- capable circuit-breakers.
breakers for the PROFIBUS-DP. visualization are only possible if the
The PROFIBUS-DP profile is described automation and low-voltage switchgear
in Chapter 4. technology components can be easily
integrated in a communication solution
Chapter 5 describes the to leverage the full range of functions
commissioning procedures and available.
possible uses of the Switch ES Power
parameterization, diagnosis, and
maintenance software with the
PROFIBUS-DP.

1-1

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 In this way, status information, alarm SENTRON Circuit-Breakers -
signals, tripping information, and Modular and Intelligent
threshold value violations (e.g. Thousands of options with just a few
overcurrent, phase asymmetry, components: That's SENTRON. A new
overvoltage) increase transparency in generation of circuit-breakers - from
power distribution systems, enabling 16A to 6300A - with a modular design
these situations to be dealt with quickly. to support every conceivable
Add-on modules (e.g. WinCC and Radio application in power distribution
Server Pro) can be used to send systems - cost effective and flexible, its
important messages via SMS to the cell communication functionality enables it
phones of maintenance personnel. to be integrated in cross-application
Prompt analysis of this data enables system solutions.
targeted intervention in the process and
prevents system failures. Cost Saving
Information for preventative Whatever the configuration, SENTRON
maintenance (e.g. the number of does the job where it matters: costs for
operating cycles or hours) enables work processes, rooms, and power.
timely personnel and material Advantages include simple retrofitting
scheduling, which increases system and a compact design benefiting
availability and prevents sensitive everyone who uses SENTRON, whether
system components from being in planning, business, or whether they
destroyed. develop or operate switchgear systems. Saving costs increases
Graphic
productivity
1-1
Communication helps provide rapid and Easy Planning
targeted information on the location
and cause of power failures. The precise The SENTRON circuit-breakers and the
cause of the fault can be determined by SIMARIS deSign planning tool provide a
recording the phase currents (e.g. trip quick and easy method for planning
as a result of a short-circuit of 2317 A in offices and switchgear cabinet
phase L2 on 08/27/2002 at 14:27). This constructors to handle long and
information can be used to quickly complex processes.
rectify the fault and potentially save a System Solutions
considerable amount of money.
By integrating SENTRON
Entering power rating values, work, and circuit-breakers in a higher-level
the power factor cos offers even more communication system, they can be
scope. The transparency of the power parameterized via PROFIBUS-DP,
consumption data for business analysis Ethernet, or the Internet; an integrated Simplified planning every step
Graphic
enables power profiles to be created of the way
power management system even 1-2
and costs to be clearly assigned. In this allows you to optimize power
way, power costs can be optimized by distribution right across the board.
balancing the peak loads and troughs.

System solutions - committed to

Graphic
simple interoperability of
1-3
SENTRON circuit-breakers

1-2

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Introduction and Overview
Bus Systems

Bus systems are used to connect distributed devices with varying levels of The protocol used by the PROFIBUS-DP
stations supports communication
intelligence. With their different structures and mechanisms, certain bus between the complex, equal-priority
systems are designed for highly specific applications, while others are programmable controllers (masters).
Each station completes its
better suited for more open applications. The following section describes communication task within a defined
time frame.
the most important bus systems used in automation and power distribution
In addition, straightforward, cyclic data
systems. exchange is carried out for
communication between a master and
the simple peripheral devices (slaves)
PROFIBUS-DP million PROFIBUS installations. assigned to it.
The PROFIBUS-DP is an open, The device can also be easily integrated The PROFIBUS-DP achieves this using a
standardized, multi-vendor field bus in and connected to standard hybrid bus access control mechanism
system. Standardized to DIN (E) 19424 automation systems, since all the major comprising a central token passing
Part 3 / EN 50170, it is ideally suited to manufacturers of programmable procedure between the active stations
fulfill the stringent requirements for control systems offer PROFIBUS-DP (masters) and a central master-slave
exchanging data in distributed master modules, and the high procedure for exchanging data between
peripheral and field devices. As at June transmission rates of up to 12 MBaud the active and passive stations.
2002, over 1,100 manufacturers were ensure virtually real-time system
offering more than 1,700 products, and operation. Bus access control enables the following
user organizations in 23 countries system configurations to be
providing support for users of over 4 implemented:

Logical token ring between the master devices

Active Stations, master devices

PROFIBUS

Meas.
value
SENTRON Sensor Actuator Actuator Sensor Actuator transmit.

Passive stations, slave devices

Communication on the PROFIBUS: token passing between the masters; polling between the master and slave stations
Graphic
1-4

1-3

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

  Pure master-slave system Acyclic data transmission can be used, Ethernet
 Pure master-master system with token for example, when operator control and The Industrial Ethernet is a
passing monitoring systems, such as WinCC, or high-performance cell network that
 A system combining both procedures configuration software, such as Switch conforms to IEE 802.3 (ETHERNET). The
ES Power (see Chapter 5), are highly successful 10Mbit/s technology,
Fig. 1-4 shows an example with 3 implemented. The PC used with an
master modules and 7 slaves. The 3 which has been used for over a decade
integrated PROFIBUS-DP interface card now, and the new 100Mbit/s
master devices form a logical ring. The then takes on the role of the class 2
MAC (bus access control) monitors the technology (Fast Ethernet to IEEE
master, from which the data records are 802.3u) in conjunction with Switching
token. It creates the token in the transmitted via DPV1 and new values
ramp-up phase and monitors whether Full Duplex and Autosensing enable the
set if the tripping current value is required network performance to be
just one token is really circulating in the changed, for example. Cyclic data
ring. adapted to different requirements. The
exchange between the circuit-breaker appropriate data rates are selected as
Each slave that communicates cyclically and the PLC, however, continues as required here because complete
via the PROFIBUS-DP is assigned a class normal. compatibility enables the technology to
1 master. Cyclic data exchange is carried be implemented on a step-by-step basis.
out to the standard DP profile (DPV0). A
class 1 master is mainly used for Used in 80% of networks, Ethernet is
automation tasks. In addition to cyclic currently the best of its kind in LAN
data exchange, a class 1 master can also environments.
establish an acyclic communication SIMATIC NET is based on this
connection to its slaves, which enables tried-and-tested technology. Siemens
it to use the extended slave has supplied well over 500,000
functionality. connections all over the world in
A class 2 master is particularly suitable frequently harsh industrial
for commissioning, diagnosis, and environments with high EMC
visualization tasks. In addition to the requirements.
class 1 master, it is connected to the In addition, Internet technology opens
PROFIBUS-DP and can access slaves and up considerable scope for worldwide
exchange data using acyclic services networking. With Industrial Ethernet,
(providing the slaves allow this). SIMATIC NET provides a tool that can be
Acyclic data transmission is carried out seamlessly integrated in the new media
via DPV1. The existing PROFIBUS landscape. The enormous potential
standard has been extended to include offered by intranets, extranets, and the
DPV1 with a number of additional Internet, which are already available in
functions. This enables the slave to be offices of all kinds, can also be
reparameterized during operation, for implemented in production and process
example, and acyclic data transmission automation environments.
to be carried out. DPV1 also allows data Unlike the PROFIBUS-DP, Ethernet does
to be read directly from the slave by a not work according to a master-slave
class 2 master, even though this is still principle. All the stations have equal
logically connected to a class 1 master. priority on the bus, which means that
Both DPV1 and DP standard any station can be the sender and/or
transmission takes place across one line. receiver. A sender can only send on the
bus if no other station is sending at that
point. This is made possible due to the
fact that the stations are always
"listening in" to find out whether any
messages are being sent to them or any
senders are currently active. If a sender
has started sending, it checks that the
message it has sent is not corrupt. If the
message is not changed, the send
operation continues.

1-4

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 If the sender detects that its data is LON (Local Operating Network). Modbus
corrupt, another sender must have This bus system is based on VLSI Modbus is an open, serial
already started sending data. In this circuits, which control communication communications protocol based on a
case, both senders abort their between up to 32,385 network nodes. master-slave architecture. Since it is
respective send operations. The nodes are arranged in subnetworks, very easy to implement on any kind of
After a random time has elapsed, the each with a maximum of 64 stations. serial interface, it can be used in a wide
sender restarts the send operation. Routers, which are also based on these range of applications. Modbus
This is known as CSMA/CDand, as a circuits (neuron chips), are responsible comprises a master and several slaves,
"random" access procedure, does not for connecting the subnetworks. The whereby communication is controlled
guarantee a response within a certain specifications are available from the exclusively by the master. Modbus
time frame. This largely depends on the manufacturer, ECHELON. features two basic communication
bus load, which means that real-time mechanisms:
applications cannot yet be implemented Depending on the data rates, a wide
range of transmission media can be  Question/answer (polling): The
with Ethernet.
used, including current leads, radio and master sends an inquiry to a station
A number of options are available for infrared channels, coaxial cables, and and waits for a response.
transmitting SENTRON circuit-breaker optical fibers.  Broadcast: The master sends a
data on the PROFIBUS-DP to the command to all the network stations,
Ethernet. Two methods using SIEMENS The LON bus is a highly distributed bus
system in which each field device which execute the command without
components are described here: confirmation.
features integrated on-site intelligence.
Method 1: LONs are mainly used for building The messages enable process data
A SIMATIC S7 controller is equipped system automation and are often (input/output data) to be written and
with a PROFIBUS-DP interface implemented in the production read either individually or in groups.
(CPU-internal interface or modules with industry. The data can either be written in ASCII
communication processors) and an One disadvantage of gateways, or transmitted as a package in RTU
Ethernet interface. The data however, is that there is always an format. Modbus is used on a wide range
transmitted from the circuit-breaker via additional time delay in the system of transmission media, in particular, on
the PROFIBUS-DP is "re-sorted" in when data is passed from one bus the RS 485 physical bus characteristics,
SIMATIC and communicated via system to another. This is because the a twisted, shielded two-wire cable with
Ethernet. Possible Ethernet data must be buffered on one side, terminating resistors (as with the
communication processors for S7 converted, and then output on the PROFIBUS-DP).
include: other side. In addition, not all functions The Modbus protocol was originally
CP 343-1, CP 343-1 IT, CP 343-1 PN, provided by the PROFIBUS-DP can be developed for networking control
CP 443-1, and the CP 443-1 IT . used when they are implemented on systems, although it is often used for
the PROFIBUS-DP (e.g. event-driven connecting input/output modules too.
Method 2: diagnostic messages). Due to the low transmission rate of
As a standalone component, the IE/PB One or more PROFIBUS-DP-capable max. 38.4 kBaud, Modbus is particularly
link provides a seamless transition circuit-breakers can be integrated in an recommended for applications with a
between Industrial Ethernet and the existing LON bus system. For this low number of stations or low time
PROFIBUS-DP. In this way, operator purpose, a gateway is required between requirements.
control and monitoring systems, for the two different bus systems, which
example, can easily access the A Modem Plus system interface with the
then makes it possible to communicate PROFIBUS-DP can be established by
PROFIBUS-DP field devices by means of with PROFIBUS-DP devices via the LON
data records being routed via the IE/PB connecting a communication module
bus. (twisted pair) to the SIMATIC S7-300 or
link.
Standalone operation is not possible S7-400.
For ordering information and other with the LONtoX gateway with the
network gateway options, refer to HERMOS PROFIBUS
Chapter 7 of the IK PI catalog. (www.hermos-informatik.de); a
SIMATIC S7 is always required on the
PROFIBUS side to prepare the data for
the gateway.

1-5

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 To operate the system, however, the Communication Structure of the ...starting at the lowest level with
Modbus protocol must first be SENTRON Circuit-Breakers simple parameterization of the
implemented as a driver for the The following diagram: circuit-breakers, to the field level with a
communication module CP 341 or CP PLC and the Switch ES Power software
 provides an overview of the different
441-2, and the gateway function then tool, through to connection to the
communication options available with
implemented in the PLC itself. intranet/Internet, and the associated
SENTRON circuit-breakers and their
This solution is not, however, potential for saving on power costs by
modules
recommended due to the excessive means of intelligent power
 illustrates the high level of system management.
amount of time and effort involved. flexibility, enabling new and
innovative ideas to be implemented... The individual circuit-breakers and their
modules are described in the following
chapters.

The system architecture of SENTRON circuit-breakers: The identical PROFIBUS-DP communication profile enables the same software
Graphic
tools to be used (Switch ES Power; PCS7 faceplates; PLC programs).
1-1

1-6

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com
 SENTRON WL

Short descriptionSENTRON WL

The c

Communication function of the trip units

The COM15 PROFIBUS Module

The Module Breaker Status Sensor

Metering and Metering Plus

External c Modules

2
PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com
 SENTRON WL
Introduction and Overview

The demands regarding communications capability, data transparency, alarm signals. This is not just a vision of
the future, but reality.
flexibility, and integration in power distribution systems are increasing all
Whether in the 3-pole or 4-pole version,
the time. The SENTRON WL is the open-design circuit-breaker that fulfills fixed-mounted or withdrawable, the
SENTRON WL circuit-breaker, which is
the requirements of the future today. available in three different sizes, covers
the entire range from 250A to 6300A.
Brief Description of the characterized by the methods used to The devices are available with different
SENTRON WL network circuit-breakers - both with switching capacity classes, thereby
each other and other components. The enabling short-circuit currents of up to
Circuit-breakers today are no longer 150 kA to be interrupted reliably. They
simply devices for protecting plants, open circuit-breakers in the SENTRON
WL family have a lot more to offer: In can be adapted to any system
transformers, generators, and motors. conditions, which means that, if
Many users now require a complete the future, it will be possible to carry out
diagnosis and maintenance procedures required, a rated current module can be
overview of the plant from a central used to adapt each circuit-breaker to the
control room and round-the-clock remotely on the Internet. Operating
staff will be given immediate appropriate rated current, for example.
access to all available information. This ensures that optimum protection is
Modern power distribution systems are information on system malfunctions or

The system architecture of the SENTRON WL with c enables simultaneous communication via the PROFIBUS-DP and BDA
Graphic
with a notebook or Ethernet/intranet/Internet.
2-1

2-1

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 provided, even if changes have been The c Communications Capability of the
made in the system. The modules can The c, which connects all the Electronic Trip Units (ETUs)
be replaced within seconds without the intelligent components within the The electronic trip units ETU45B,
need for the transformer to be changed. SENTRON WL and enables additional ETU55B, and ETU76B are all
A switchover between two different external components to be connected communications capable. The
parameter sets is also possible. This quickly and reliably, forms the c is connected to the
function is particularly useful in the backbone of the standardized, modular circuit-breaker terminals X8:1 to X8:4.
event of a power failure when an architecture of the SENTRON WL. The
automatic switchover is made from Different versions of
c is already integrated in and communications-capable trip units are
on-line to generator operation, a connected to all complete
process which can also involve all the available.
circuit-breakers with the ETU45B,
release conditions changing. ETU55B, and ETU76B trip units The front of the ETU45B is fitted with a
A wide range of locking systems are (i). rotary coding switch for setting the
available to improve reliability during protection parameters. These can only
The high level of system modularity be read via the communication device.
critical processes. All accessories, such enables communication functions (e.g.
as auxiliary releases, motorized drives, The ETU45B can also be fitted with a
metering function) to be retrofitted at four-line display for the measured
and communication systems, can be any time. A SENTRON WL that is not yet
retrofitted quickly and easily; this is values.
communications capable can be
made all the easier since the accessories upgraded (e.g. by exchanging ETU25B The ETU55B does not have a rotary
are identical across the entire range. for ETU45B with c) quickly coding switch or a display. The
The commitment to reducing the and easily on site. All c protection parameters can only be
overall number of parts results in fewer modules can access the existing source changed via the PROFIBUS-DP or BDA.
parts to be ordered and lower storage data of the circuit-breaker directly, They can only be changed using a
costs. thereby ensuring rapid access to software tool, which is why the ETU55B
The core of each circuit-breaker is the information and speedy responses to is known as a safety trip unit. The
electronic trip unit (ETU). Several events. protection parameters can be set both
versions are available to adapt the remotely and on a step-by-step basis.
By connecting additional, external
protective, metering, and signaling modules to the c, Like the ETU55B, the ETU76B features a
functions to the system requirements: cost-effective solutions for automating full-graphics display with a
from simple overload and short-circuit other devices in the switchgear can be clearly-structured, key-driven menu.
protection to trip units that can be implemented. This not only enables operators to
parameterized remotely and which display measured values, status
feature a wide range of metering and information, and maintenance
signaling functions. information, but also to read all the
All circuit-breakers with type ETU45B, existing parameters and make
ETU55B, and ETU76B trip units are password-protected changes.
communications capable, and enable
additional components to be
integrated, which are networked
internally via the c.
To provide a SENTRON WL with trip unit
ETU15B, ETU25B, or ETU27B with
communications capability, the
overcurrent release must be replaced
because it cannot be connected to the
c.
The circuit-breaker is connected to the
PROFIBUS-DP via the RS485 interface of
the COM15 module.
The breaker data adapter (see Chapter
6) also supports higher-level
networking/communication
(intranet/Internet).

2-2

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Functional Overview of the Overcurrent Release System
Basic functions ETU15B ETU25B ETU27B
Overload protection
Function can be switched on or off – – –
Setting range IR = In × ... 0,5-0,6-0,7-0,8-0,9-1 0,4-0,45-0,5-0,55-0,6- 0,4-0,45-0,5-0,55-0,6-
0,65-0,7-0,8-0,9-1 0,65-0,7-0,8-0,9-1

L Switchable
2 4
overload protection
(I t- or I t-dependent function)
– – –

Setting range for trip class tR atI2t 10 s fixed 10 s fixed 10 s fixed

Setting range for trip class tR at I4t – – –
Thermal image – – –
Phase failure sensitivity – at tsd = 20 ms (M) at tsd = 20 ms (M)
Neutral conductor protection – –
N Function can be switched on or off
Neutral conductor setting range IN = In × ...
–
–
–
–
(per sliding-dolly switch)
0-1
Short-time delayed short-circuit protection – – –
Function can be switched on or off – – –
Setting range Isd = In × ... – 1,25-1,5-2-2,5-3-4-6-8-10-12 1,25-1,5-2-2,5-3-4-6-8-10-12

S Setting range for delay-time tsd

Switchable short-time delayed short-circuit protection
–
–
0-M-100-200-300-400
–
0-M-100-200-300-400
–
(I2t-dependent function)
Setting range for delay-time tsd at I2t – – –
Short-time grading control (ZSS) – – –
Instantaneous short-circuit protection ¸ ¸ ¸
I Function can be switched on or off
Setting range Ii = In × ...
–
2-3-4-5-6-7-8
– –
fixed for Ii 20 x In, max. 50 kA fixed for Ii 20 x In, max. 50 kA
Earth-fault protection – – fixed-mounting
Release and alarm function – – –
Release function can be switched on or off – – (per rotary coding switch)
Alarm function can be switched on or off – – –
Detection of the earth-fault current via summation current – –
formation with internal or external neutral conductor
transformer

G Detection of the earth-fault current via external

PE conductor transformer
– – –

Setting range of the operating current Ig for release – – OFF-A-B-C-D-E

Setting range of the operating current Ig for alarm – – –
Setting range for the delay-time tg – – 100-200-300-400-500 ms
Switchable earth-fault protection – – –
(I2t-dependent function)
Setting range for delay-time tg at I2t – – –
Zone-selective interlocking function (ZSS-g) – – –
Parameter sets
Switchable – – –
LCD
Alpha-numeric LCD (4 lines) – – –
Graphic LCD – – –
Communications
CubicleBUS integrated – – –
Communication-capable via PROFIBUS-DP – – –
Metering function
capable with metering or metering function Plus – – –
LED display
Tripping unit active ¸
Alarm ¸
Internal release fault ¸
L-release –
S-release –
I-release –
N-release – –
G-release – –
G-alarm – – –
Release via external signals – – –
Communications – – –
Signals from signalling switches with external CubicleBUS modules (optical or relays)
Overload warning – – –
Load shedding, load receiving – – –
Leading overload signal 200 ms – – –
Temperature alarm – – –
Asymmetrical phase – – –
Instantaneous short-circuit release – – –
Short-time delayed short-circuit release – – –
Overload release – – –
Neutral conductor release – – –
Earth-fault protection release – – –
Auxiliary relay – – –
Release malfunction – – –
The functional overview of the overcurrent release system contains the various functions and options available for the
Table
non-communications-capable trip units ETU15B, ETU25B, and ETU27B, as well as for the communications-capable trip units ETU45B,
2-1
ETU55B, and ETU76B.

2-3

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Basic functions ETU45B ETU55B ETU76B
Overload protection
Function can be switched on or off – (on/off per Comm)
Setting range IR = In × ... 0,4-0,45-0,5-0,55-0,6- 0,4 bis 1 0,4 bis 1
0,65-0,7-0,8-0,9-1
Switchable overload protection (per sliding-dolly switch) (per comm)
( I2t- or I4t-dependent function)
Setting range for trip class tR at I2t 2-3-5-5,5-8-10-14-17-21-25-30 s 2 up to 30 s 2 up to30 s
Setting range for trip class tR at I4t 1-2-3-4-5 s 1-5 s 1-5 s
Thermal image (on/off per sliding-dolly switch) (on/off per Comm) (on/off per menu/comm)
Phase failure sensitivity at tsd = 20 ms (M) at tsd = 20 ms (M) at tsd = 20 ms (M)
Neutral conductor protection
Function can be switched on or off per sliding-dolly switch (per Comm) (per Menü/Comm)
Neutral conductor setting range IN = In × ... 0-0,5-1 0,5 up to 2 0,5 up to 2
Short-time delayed short-circuit protection
Function can be switched on or off (per rotary coding switch) (per Comm) (per menu/comm)
Setting range Isd = In × ... 1,25-1,5-2-2,5-3-4-6-8-10-12 1,25 up to 12 × In (Comm) 1,25 × In ... <0,8 × Icw
Setting range for delay-time t sd M-100-200-300-400-OFF ms 20- up to max. 4000 ms 20- bis max. 4000 ms
Switchable short-time delayed short-circuit protection (per rotary coding switch) (per Comm) (per menu/comm)
( I2t-dependent function)
Setting range for delay-time tsd at I t2 100-200-300-400 ms 100-400 ms; OFF 100-400 ms; OFF
Short-time grading control (ZSS) per c module als cmodule als c module
Instantaneous short-circuit protection
Function can be switched on or off (per rotary coding switch) (per Comm) (per Menü/Comm)
Setting range Ii = In × ... 1,5-2,2-3-4-6-8-10-12-0,8 × ICS-OFF 1,5 × In bis 0,8 × Ics 1,5 × In bis 0,8 × Ics
Earth-fault protection Module can be retro-fitted Module can be retro-fittedl Module can be retro-fitted
Release and alarm function
Release function can be switched on or off (per rotary coding switch) (per comm) (per menu/comm)
Alarm function can be switched on or off – (per comm) (per menu/comm)
Detection of the earth-fault current via summation current
formation with internal or external neutral conductor
transformer
Detection of the earth-fault current via external
PE conductor transformer
Setting range of the operating current Ig for release OFF-A-B-C-D-E 10% In up to max. 1200 A 10% In up to max. 1200 A
Setting range of the operating current Ig for alarm A-B-C-D-E 10% In up to max. 1200 A 10% In up to max. 1200 A
Setting range for the delay-time t g 100-200-300-400-500 ms 100-200-300-400-500 ms 100-200-300-400-500 ms
Switchable earth-fault protection
( I2t-dependent function)
Setting range for delay-time tg at I2t 100-200-300-400-500 ms 100 up to 500 ms 100 up to 500 ms
Zone-selective interlocking function (ZSS-g) per c module per c -Modul per c-Modul
Parameter sets
Switchable –
LCD
Alpha-numeric LCD (4 lines) – –
Graphic LCD – – ETU 76 B
Communication
CubicleBUS integrated
Communication-capable via PROFIBUS-DP
Metering function
capable with metering or metering function Plus 3
LED display
Tripping unit active
Alarm
Internal release fault
L-release
S-release
I-release
N-release
G-release (only w. earth-fault prot. module) (only w. earth-fault prot. module) (only w. earth-fault prot. module)
G-alarm (only w. earth-fault prot. module) (only w. earth-fault prot. module) (only w. earth-fault prot. module)
Release via external signals
Communications
Signals from signalling switches with external CubicleBUS modules (optical or relays)
Overload warning
Load shedding, load receiving
Leading overload signal 200 ms
Temperature alarm
Asymmetrical phase
Instantaneous short-circuit release
Short-time delayed short-circuit release
Overload release
Neutral conductor release
Earth-fault protection release (only w. earth-fault prot. module) (only w. earth-fault prot. module) (only w. earth-fault prot. module)
Auxiliary relay (only w. earth-fault prot. module) (only w. earth-fault prot. module) (only w. earth-fault prot. module)
Release malfunction

2-4

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Data Availability on the c Again, the relevant property byte
All modules connected to the contains this information.
c can request data from The following table provides an
other modules via the bus and generate overview of the internal c
data themselves that can be read by modulesmoduls and the data point
other modules. groups (collection of several data
Each data point in the comprehensive points) assigned to them.
SENTRON circuit-breaker data library See Chapter 7 Data Library for a detailed
can only be generated by a single description of the individual data
module - the data source. If this data points.
source (module) exists, the data points
assigned to it also exist.
This information is described and
communicated in the property bytes.
If a data source (module) does not exist,
the data point does not exist either.

c moduls
Data point group ETU as of BSS COM15 Metering Met. fct.
Data points with the same source ETU45B function Plus
Protection parameter set A
Protection parameter set B (not for ETU45B)
Extended protection parameters
Parameter for setpoints
PROFIBUS communication parameters
Parameters for metering settings
Device identification data
Circuit-breaker position specifications
Status info. (circuit-breaker on/off, storage spring, etc.)
Alarms
Trips
Setpoint messages
Maintenance information
Circuit-breaker temperature
Temperature in the cubicle
3-phase currents
Current in N-conductor, ground-fault current; equip. spec.
3-phase voltage
Power P, Q, S, energy
cos
Frequency, total harm. distortion, form factor, crest factor
Harmonic analysis
Waveform buffer
Log book for events and trips
System time
The table shows which data points from the data library are generated by which c module, enabling you to quickly
Table
find out which modules are required for which system.
2-2

2-5

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 SENTRON WL
The PROFIBUS-DP COM15 Module and the BSS

The COM15 module enables the SENTRON WL circuit-breaker to exchange Pin Configuration

data via the PROFIBUS-DP simultaneously with two masters. The COM15 The COM15 module is connected to the
auxiliary conductor plug-in system at
module retrieves some of the key data on the status of the circuit-breaker X7.

(circuit-breaker on/off, storage spring, available etc.) via the c The electrical connections to the
circuit-breaker and the c
from the BSS (breaker status sensor). Both modules are, therefore, offered connection to the
circuit-breaker-internal c
together as a PROFIBUS-DP communication connection (option F02). moduls (ETU, BSS, metering function)
must also be established. This is
PROFIBUS-DP Module COM15 All key events are assigned a time stamp achieved by connecting the four lines
from the integrated clock to enable brought out at the rear of the COM15
The COM15 module for the SENTRON module to the auxiliary conductor
WL enables the circuit-breaker to be operators to keep track of malfunctions.
A simple mechanism allows the clock to plug-in system at X8.
connected to the PROFIBUS-DP. It
supports the DP and DPV1 PROFIBUS be synchronized with the clock in the Interface relays must be used if the
protocols, which means that it can automation system. opening and closing solenoids are
communicate with two masters A temperature sensor integrated in the designed for voltages higher than
simultaneously. This makes it easier, for COM15 module measures the 24 V DC.
example, to commission temperature in the switchgear cabinet. Terminals X5:11 and X5:12 must be
parameterization and diagnostic tools Three integrated microkeys located on used if the second auxiliary release (F2,
(e.g. Switch ES Power) and operator the underside of the COM15 module are F3, F4) rather than the first auxiliary
control and monitoring systems (e.g. used to detect the position of the release (F1) is used to switch off the
WinCC) for the SENTRON WL. circuit-breaker (operating, test, device via the PROFIBUS-DP.
If required, control/write access to the disconnected, and not present) and The unassigned user output can be used
circuit-breaker can, for safety reasons, read it via the PROFIBUS-DP. The as required and must be connected in
be locked using hardware and software circuit-breaker can only be switched on the same way as a coupling device (see
to prevent any switching operations and off in the operating and test Fig. 2-4). It can be used, for example, to
taking place via PROFIBUS position. activate the F7 solenoid for retrieving
(manual/automatic operation) or the red tripped plunger if option K10
parameters from being changed, for has been installed. As with Open and
example. Close, only voltages of up to 24 V DC are
permitted (note the polarity); coupling
devices must be used for higher
voltages.
The PROFIBUS line must be connected
to the 9-pole interface on the front of
the COM15 module. The c
connection for RJ45 plugs is located at
the rear and is used to connect the
external c modules. If no
external c module is
connected, the terminating resistor
The text on the COM15 module shows the external pin configuration for supplied must be used as an RJ45 plug.
Graphic
connecting the closing solenoid and the shunt trips, as well as the PROFIBUS write
2-2 The unassigned user input can be
protection function and the unassigned input/output.
connected using a contact element with
the 24 V DC from pin 1 to transmit the

2-6

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 status of the contact element.

PROFIBUS Write Protection

(DPWriteEnable)
In real power distribution systems, write
access via PROFIBUS has to be locked
either temporarily or permanently.
The COM15 module features a
hardware input for this purpose. Pin 1
provides the 24 V DC supply, which can
be fed back to pin 2, for example,
(DPWriteEnable) via a contact element.
If this input is not bridged (active
release), write access is not possible
(there are a number of exceptions
here).

The following actions are blocked if the

input of the write protection function
has not been bridged:
 Switch on/off
 Reset the last trip
 Change the protective parameters
 Change the parameters for the This diagram illustrates how to wire the COM15 module with the auxiliary power
Graphic
plug-in contacts if the PROFIBUS is to be used to switch the device on and off.
extended protection function 2-3
This diagram only applies to contact elements with 24 V DC.
(metering function)
 Change the communication
parameters
 Change the parameters for the
metering options (metering function)
 Reset maintenance information
(counters)
 Force the digital outputs (in the
Module Operation screen in Switch ES
Power)
 DPV1 start-up parameters from the
Switch ES Power Object Manager

The following control functions are

available even if the write protection
function has not been bridged:
 Change and set the trigger functions
for the waveform buffer
 Read the content of the waveform
buffer
 Change the setpoint parameters
 Set/change the system time
 Change the free texts (comments,
system IDs)
 Reset the min./max. values Interface relays are required if contact elements with a voltage other than 24 V
Graphic
 Change the unassigned user output DC are used. If F1 is not used to switch off the device, terminals X5:11/X5:12 for
2-4
F2 to F4 must be connected.
The write protection function ensures

2-7

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 that all the required information can be
transmitted, but prevents any changes
Terminals
to the status of the circuit-breaker.
Changes can only be made by the
operator of the power distribution
PROFIBUS LED
system.
c LED
Why does the write protection function
permit certain actions?
All actions that are not blocked are for
remote diagnosis only and do not have
any effect on the current status. Trips
and curves can, however, be diagnosed
more accurately, even using remote
methods.

Communication LED
Data Exchange via the COM15
on the trip unit
Module
When the COM15 module is configured
to exchange data, it is important to note
that it is shipped as standard with the
Front view of the PROFIBUS module for the SENTRON WL with the PROFIBUS
PROFIBUS-DP address 126. This must be Fig.
connection and the two LEDs. The figure below shows a section of the ETU45B
changed during system configuration 2-1
and its LEDs for displaying statuses.
(e.g. with the BDA, Switch ES Power, or
ETU76B display).
The COM15 module has two LEDs
(PROFIBUS and c) for
diagnostic purposes. These indicate the
operating state of the PROFIBUS-DP and
Terminating resistor
the c.
Two LEDs are used to determine
whether a c in the
circuit-breaker is operational. First, the
"COMM" LED on the trip unit must be
green, that is, the trip unit has
recognized at least one other
c module. In the worst case
scenario, this would only be the
metering function/metering function
Plus if the c was then
interrupted. Second, the c
LED on the COM15 module must be Rear view of the COM15 module. The RJ45 connection for the external
Fig.
c modules can be clearly seen here. If no external c
taken into account. If this is lit with a 2-2
module is connected, the bus must be terminated with the terminating resistor
steady green light, a connection exists
from the COM15 module to at least the
metering function/metering function Meaning Position and text on the cable
Plus. c- X8:1
If both LEDs are green (steady light for c+ X8:2
c on the COM15 module and
24 V DC + X8:3
COMM on the trip unit), communication
is fully established between the trip unit 24 V DC ground X8:4
and the COM15 module. Table
The 4 black cables from the COM15 module must be connected to terminal strip
X8, which is used to connect the COM15 module to the moduls on the
Data is exchanged according to the 2-3
c in the circuit-breaker.
following principle: an up-to-date copy

2-8

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 communicates "circuit-breaker not
PROFIBUS LED Meaning
present" until the "test position" key is
Off No voltage on the COM15 module
actuated. The diagnosis is delayed by 10
seconds to ensure that it is not triggered
Bus error
Red Communication not possible
when the circuit-breaker is being
No communication with class 1 master positioned, despite the message
indicating that it is not present; in other
Green PROFIBUS communication OK
Cyclic data transmission with class 1 master words, when the "disconnected
position" key is released,
The PROFIBUS LED provides information on the state of PROFIBUS
Table "circuit-breaker not present" is
communication in the COM15 module.
2-4 communicated immediately via the
cyclic channel and via the DPV1 data
sets. The diagnostic message is,
c LED Meaning however, delayed. If the "test position"
Off No c modules found microkey is actuated before the 10
seconds have elapsed, no diagnosis is
Red c error triggered.
When the circuit-breaker is pulled out,
Green flashing c module found, but no metering
function/metering function Plus or trip unit
no further microkeys are actuated.
"Circuit-breaker not present" is
c module found and connection with
Steady green light communicated immediately on the
the metering function/metering function Plus
and/or trip unit cyclic channel and in the DPV1 data
sets.
The c LED provides information on the state of c
Table
communication in the COM15 module. With fixed-mounted circuit-breakers, a
2-5
heel plate is screwed to the COM15
module to transmit the operating
position.
Position Rear microkey Middle microkey Front microkey
(S46) (S47) (S48) The COM15 module features a built-in
Operating position 1 0 0 temperature sensor, which, on account
of the fact that it is installed outside the
Test/check position 0 1 0
circuit-breaker, measures the
Disconnected position 0 0 1 temperature in the cubicle.
Circ.-breaker not present 0 0 0 It also contains a clock that provides a
Table
The COM15 module has 3 microkeys for determining the position of the time stamp for all events, such as
circuit-breaker in the guide frame. Depending on which key is actuated, the minimum and maximum measured
2-6
position described above is communicated via the comm. system (1 = actuated).
values, as well as warnings and trips.
Like the clock in the COM10 module of
of all SENTRON WL data (apart from the When the circuit-breaker is moved, the the SENTRON VL (Chapter 3), it can be
waveform buffer) is always stored in the microkey that has been actuated must synchronized via the PROFIBUS-DP.
COM15 module. A response to a data be released before the next key is Like the COM10 module, the COM15
query from the COM15 module to the actuated. No microkeys are actuated in module supports an automatic baud
PROFIBUS-DP can, therefore, take just a the intervening period. As far as rate search on the PROFIBUS-DP, which
few milliseconds. Write data from the communication is concerned, the "old" means that the baud rate does not have
PROFIBUS-DP is forwarded to the state is communicated until a new state to be set.
appropriate addressee on the is reached when the circuit-breaker is
c. moved (see Table 2-6).
Three microkeys located on the There is no way of determining the
underside of the COM15 module direction in which the circuit-breaker is
determine the position of a being moved once the "disconnected
withdrawable circuit-breaker in the position" microkey has been released.
guide frame, which is then When the circuit-breaker is pushed in,
communicated via the COM15 module. the next key to be actuated is the "test
The positions are defined in Table 2-6. position". The COM15 module

2-9

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Breaker Status Sensor (BSS) The BSS sets the following information: option Z=F01 or order it later as a spare
BSS stands for "breaker status sensor".  State of the storage spring part.
All microkeys that contain information  Position of the main contacts
on the state of the circuit-breaker are (on/off)
either fitted directly to the BSS or  Availability signal
connected to it. The BSS makes this  Tripped signaling switch on the trip
digital information available on the unit (connected to the red tripped
c. plunger)
If the circuit-breaker-internal states on  Signaling switch on the first auxiliary
the switchgear cabinet are to be release
displayed or read via the PROFIBUS-DP,  Signaling switch on the second
for example, the BSS module and the auxiliary release
appropriate signaling switch must be
 Temperature in the circuit-breaker (on
installed (if they are not already). The
account of the installation location in
circuit-breaker must be fitted with an
the circuit-breaker)
electronic trip unit of type ETU45B or
higher. The BSS is already included in order
option Z=F02 (PROFIBUS-DP
The BSS can also be retrofitted to the
communication).
SENTRON WL.
If a BSS is required without
PROFIBUS-DP communication (e.g. for
operating the BDA), you can specify this
when ordering the circuit-breaker with

c to the metering function

or ETU

c to X:8
Tripped signaling switch or terminating resistor
on ETU

Availability
signal

2nd aux. trip unit

On/off position

Memory state message 1st aux. trip unit

This picture shows the BSS signaling contacts and how they have to be
Fig.
connected.
2-3

2-10

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 SENTRON WL
Metering Function and Metering Function Plus

The integrated metering function can be used with all trip units with a speeds up response to system
malfunctions or other exceptional
c connection. It not only extends the range of protection situations. As a result, the metering
functions of the trip unit, but also provides additional warnings and function significantly increases system
availability.
diagnostic options. With its comprehensive range of measured values, the The metering function is fitted to the
integrated SENTRON WL metering function is an excellent alternative to back of the trip unit (ETU), as shown in
Fig. 2-4. The trip unit and metering
external multi-function metering devices. function exchange all current data via a
high-speed synchronous interface. The
metering function provides all the
General extended protection function (e.g. connected modules (e.g. the COM15
In addition to the current values overvoltage), the metering function module or BDA) with the parameters for
supplied by the trip unit, the metering also provides further options for the extended protection function, the
function provides all the measured monitoring and protecting the setpoints, measured value settings, and
values in the power distribution system connected power distribution system. the determined measured values via the
required for Power Management The option of generating warnings if c so that they can be
(voltage, power, and so on) . With its definable setpoints are exceeded processed further. Using the two
c connections, the metering
function is connected to the trip unit
and either the BSS or directly to
Back of ETU connection block X8. This depends on
the circuit-breaker configuration.
The metering function can be
implemented with all circuit-breakers
with ETU45B, ETU55B, and ETU76B. If
Metering the metering function is ordered with
function order code Z=F04 (metering function)
or Z=F05 (metering function Plus)
together with the circuit-breaker, it will
already be installed and ready for
operation. The metering function (and
metering function Plus) can be
retrofitted at any time if the
circuit-breaker is equipped with one of
To voltage transformer
the above-mentioned trip units. It is
c
X8:5 to X8:8 simply screwed onto the trip unit and
c the c lines are snapped in.
Caution: If retrofitted by the customer,
Connection for optional Connection for the metering function is not calibrated
external N and G transformers circuit-breaker ID with the trip unit; that is, the accuracy
module
of the specifications in Table 2-7 cannot
be ensured.

The metering function/metering function Plus is located on the back of the trip
Fig.
unit. With options F04 and F05, the connections are already properly connected.
2-4

2-11

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Metering function Plus
The metering function Plus extends the
range of metering functions to include
harmonic and waveform analysis.

Harmonic analysis
The metering function Plus senses the
prevailing current and voltage, saves
the measured values, and carries out a
fast Fourier transformation. The result
of this is the distribution of the
harmonic oscillations (in %) up to the
29th harmonic. The calculated values
are made available via the c
and can be displayed via Switch ES
Power and the BDA (see Chapters 5 and
6). They can also be saved as an
Excel-compatible *.csv file for
subsequent diagnosis. On the ETU76B
trip unit, the measured and calculated The metering function Plus analyzes the harmonics. This screenshot from the
Fig.
values can also be displayed. Switch ES Power system shows how the analysis results are displayed.
2-5
The harmonic analysis enables not only
the quality of the network to be
analyzed and logged, but also possible
reasons for malfunctions to be
diagnosed and then eliminated as a
precaution.

Waveform buffer
The metering function Plus features two
independent waveform buffers (A and
B). Each one has 8 channels, one each
for currents IL1, IL2, IL3, IN, and Ig, and
voltages UL1N, UL2N, and UL3N. Each
channel is sensed with a frequency of
1,649 kHz and the values are "pushed"
through a shift register (length: 1
second). The process of pushing data
through the shift register can be
aborted by a parameterizable trigger
event. Trigger events include trips,
warnings, and setpoint warnings so that
the voltage waveform, for example, can
be recorded in the event of
undervoltage tripping.
The trigger event can be set individually
for each waveform buffer. The point at
which the trigger event is to take place
in the waveform buffer can also be
defined. This setting can be used to set
the ratio of the pre-event history to the
post-event history. If the pre-trigger
event history is to be analyzed, the The metering function Plus can record the current waveform. This can be
Fig.
position can be set to 80%. When the displayed and exported using Switch ES Power, for example. An I trip is shown
2-6
here.

2-12

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 event occurs, 0.8 seconds of pre-event
history and 0.2 seconds of post-event
history are available in the waveform
buffer, and an existing COM15 module
adds a time stamp to the trigger event.
Each waveform buffer stops
independently depending on the trigger
event and can be activated again once
the analysis is complete.
The large volume of analysis data
(approx. 25 kByte for each waveform)
can be downloaded and analyzed using
Switch ES Power, the BDA, and the
ETU76B display. Depending on the
program, a range of zoom options and
export functions are available.
Before data is downloaded, the required
channels should be selected, since it
takes approximately one minute to
download the data for each channel.
The diagram illustrates how the voltage transformer is connected for operation
There are two reasons why it takes this Fig.
with a metering function. The transformer can be star or delta-connected on the
long: first, besides recording measured 2-7
primary side.
values, calculating the harmonics, and
executing the extended protection Voltage Transformer Parameters for setting the measured
function, the metering function has a For safety reasons, a voltage values
number of higher-priority tasks to transformer is used in conjunction with To calculate the measured values, the
complete acyclically; second, a large the metering function and metering voltage transformer data must be taken
volume of data is transmitted. A function Plus. This prevents voltage into account and set in the metering
progress bar in Switch ES Power and the signals of up to 1 kV from reaching the function. This data includes:
BDA displays the progress of the back of the ETU directly via the auxiliary  Primary voltage of the voltage
download. conductor connections. transformer (factory setting: 400 V)
The voltage transformer converts the  Secondary voltage of the voltage
high primary voltage to a secondary transformer (factory setting: 100 V)
voltage of between 100 and 120 V,  Connection type on the primary side
depending on the version. (factory setting: delta)
The voltage transformer can be star or The following tools and functions are
delta-connected on the primary side. available if the parameters have to be
On the secondary side, a star changed:
connection is always used to connect it  Switch ES Power
to the auxiliary conductor plug-in
 BDA/BDA Plus
system (X8:5 to X8:8). See Fig. 2-7.
 ETU76B display
If the level of accuracy specified in the
 Data set 129 via the PROFIBUS-DP
following table is to be attained, a class
0.5 voltage transformer must be used.
The burden of the metering function is
27 k , which means that up to 6
metering functions can be connected
simultaneously to a voltage transformer
with an apparent power of 2.5 VA.

2-13

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 The metering function provides the following measured values for communication system:
Value range Accuracy (with direct order: circuit-breaker + trip
Measured value
unit + met. function or met. function Plus)1
Currents IL1, IL2, IL3, I N 30...8000A ± 1%

Ground-fault current Ig (measure with external G transformer) 100...1200A ± 5%

Phase-to-phase voltages UL12, U L23, UL31 80...120% Un ± 1%

Neutral-point displacement voltages UL1N, UL2N, UL3N 80...120% Un ± 1%

Instantaneous mean value of phase-to-phase voltages ULLavg 80...120% Un ± 1%

Instant. mean value of neutral-point displ. voltages ULLavg 80...120% Un ± 1%

Apparent power SL1, SL2, SL3 13...8000kVA ± 2%

Total apparent power Stotal 13...24000kVA ± 2%

Active power PL1, PL2, PL3 -8000...8000kW ± 3% (cos > 0.6)

Total active power Stotal -24000...24000kVA ± 3% (cos > 0.6)

Reactive power QL1, QL2, QL3 -6400...6400kvar ± 4% (cos > 0.6)

Total reactive power Stotal -20000...20000kvar ± 4% (cos > 0.6)

Power factors cos L1, cos L2, cos L3 -0.6...1...0.6 ± 0.04

Power factors cos avg -0.6...1...0.6 ± 0.04

Demand of currents IL1, IL2, IL3 30...8000A ± 1%

Demand of 3-phase current 30...8000A ± 1%

Demand of active power P L1, PL2, PL3 13...8000kW ± 3% (cos > 0.6)

Demand of 3-phase active power 13...8000kW ± 3% (cos > 0.6)

Demand of apparent power SL1, SL2, SL3 13...8000kVA ± 2%

Demand of 3-phase apparent power 13...8000kVA ± 2%

Demand of 3-phase reactive power -24000...24000kvar ± 4% (cos > 0.6)
Active energy in normal direction 1...10000MWh ± 2%
Active energy in reverse direction 1...10000MWh ± 2%
Reactive energy in normal direction 1...10000Mvarh ± 4%
Reactive energy in reverse direction 1...10000Mvarh ± 4%
Frequency 15...440Hz ± 0.1Hz
Total harmonic distortions for current and voltage 2...100% ± 3% from the meas. range up to the 29th harmonic
Phase unbalance for current and voltage 2...150% ± 1%
The metering function provides a minimum and maximum measured value for each measured value specified above. If the
Table
metering function is retrofitted by the customer, the accuracy of the values specified cannot be ensured, since it will not have
2-7
been calibrated with the trip unit.
1.Accuracy is specified as follows: ± (x%) from the upper limit of effective range + 2 LSD (Least Significant Digit)) for one year after calibration
Reference conditions:
Input current Inmax ± 1%
Input voltage U n ± 1%
Frequency f = 50Hz
Power factor cos = 1
Waveform Sine, total harmonic distortion 5%; symmetrical load
Ambient temperature 35°C ± 5°C
Auxiliary supply DC 24 V to DIN 19240 / EN61131
Warm-up period 2 hours
Relative air humidity Up to 90%
External fields None
Metering range:
Current 0.2 ... 1.2 I nmax
Voltage 0.8 ... 1.2 Unmax

2-14

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 The extended protection function of the metering function can monitor the following criteria and initiate a trip if values are
exceeded.
Parameter Setting range Possible delay
Phase unbalance - current 5...50% 1...15s
Total harmonic distortion - current 5...50% 5...15s
Phase unbalance - voltage 5...50% 1...15s
Undervoltage 100...1100V 1...15s
Overvoltage 200...1200V 1...15s
Total harmonic distortion - voltage 5...50% 5...15s
Direction of phase rotation - -
Active power in normal direction 13...4000kW 2...15s
Active power in reverse direction 13...4000kW 2...15s
Underfrequency 40...70Hz 1...15s
Overfrequency 40...70Hz 1...15s
Additional release criteria can be set using the extended protection function of the metering function. A delay time can be
Table
parameterized to prevent events that occur briefly from "clashing". In this way, the circuit-breaker will not trip unless the set event
2-8
is present for longer than the delay time.

The metering function provides the following values:

Parameter Setting range Possible delay
Overcurrent 30...10000A 1...255s
Overcurrent - ground fault 30...10000A 1...255s
Overcurrent - N-conductor 30...10000A 1...255s
Phase unbalance - current 5...50% 1...255s
Demand - current 30...10000A 1...255s
Total harmonic distortion - current 5...50% 5...255s
Undervoltage 15...1200V 1...255s
Overvoltage 200...1200V 1...255s
Phase unbalance - voltage 5...50% 1...255s
Total harmonic distortion - voltage 5...50% 5...255s
crest factor and form factor 1...3,000 5...255s
Active power in normal direction 13...10000kW 1...255s
Active power in reverse direction 13...10000kW 1...255s
Leading power factor 0...-0.99 1...255s
Lagging power factor 0...0.99 1...255s
Demand - active power -10000...10000kW 1...255s
Apparent power 13...10000kVA 1...255s
Reactive power in normal direction 13...10000kvar 1...255s
Reactive power in reverse direction 13...10000kvar 1...255s
Demand - apparent power 13...10000kVA 1...255s
Demand - reactive power 13...10000kvar 1...255s
Underfrequency 40...70Hz 1...255s
Overfrequency 40...70Hz 1...255s
Parameters can be set to define whether a warning is to be generated if a setpoint is overshot or undershot. Like the extended
Table
protection function, this can be delayed. These warnings are communicated on the c (e.g. for the configurable output
2-9
module or as a trigger for the waveform buffer) and transmitted via the COM15 module.

2-15

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 SENTRON WL
External c Modules

By connecting additional, external modules to the c,

information on this is provided with the
circuit-breaker-internal information can be displayed and data read from descriptions of the individual modules.

the switchgear to the system. This enables cost-effective solutions to be Installation

implemented for automating other devices in the switchgear. The external c modules are
clipped onto a standard 35 mm DIN rail
on the panel. The lead for connecting
output module, all external c the first module to the circuit-breaker
General
modules are configured using rotary must be no longer than 2 m.
External c modules enable
coding switches. Only the prefabricated lines, which are
the SENTRON WL circuit-breaker to
The arrow on the rotary coding switch either ordered separately or supplied,
communicate with secondary devices in
points to the function that is currently must be used to connect the
the circuit-breaker cubicle. They can be
active. With certain modules (e.g. digital c modules to each other and
used, for example, to activate analog
output modules), the group selection to the circuit-breaker. These lines enable
displays, transmit circuit-breaker alarm
(e.g. "1st Module" left; highlighted) and the various components to
signals and tripping reasons, and read
then any other factors (e.g. time delay) communicate and supply the
additional control signals. One module
must be taken into account. More c modules with 24 V DC.
is also available for integrating
reduced-time discrimination control in
the event of a short-circuit.
Five different c modules can
output data from the c
system (four digital output modules and LED indicator
one analog output module). A digital
Test button
input module can transmit data from
Rotary coding switch
the switchgear cabinet to the
PROFIBUS-DP, and a ZSI module enables
zone selective interlocking among the
circuit-breakers.

Rotary coding switch X1: c

X2: c
With the exception of the configurable

50
X3: c

X5: Inputs/outputs

X4: Inputs/outputs

In this example, the rotary All external c modules have the same housing. The c can
Graphic Fig.
coding switch has been set to be connected to X1 and X2 with an RJ45 plug or a terminal connection made to
2-5 2-8
function "0.2". X3. This depends on whether a COM15 module is available.

2-16

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Power Supply Maximum c c Installation Guidelines
The c must be supplied with Configuration  Total length of the c lines:
24 V DC across its entire length. The c can comprise up to 13 max. 10m
Terminals X8:3 and X8:4 or the 4-pole moduls :  Only the prefabricated lines must be
plug for the external c  Electronic trip unit (ETU) used to connect the c
modules (X3) are available for this  metering function or metering modules.
purpose. As already mentioned, the 24 function Plus  On the final module, the line must be
V is conducted via thec lines. terminated with a 120 terminating
 Breaker status sensor (BSS)
The power required for the 24 V DC resistor (supplied with each module).
 COM15
supply depends on the c  The lines must always be connected
 BDA or BDA Plus
configuration. The technical data for from module to module. Spur lines
the external c modules is  S module are not permitted.
provided in this chapter. The trip units,  Digital output module with switch  The power supply must be provided
metering function, BSS, and the COM15 position to the left (1st module) by a standard-tolerance 24 V DC
module together require less than 500  Digital output module with switch power supply unit with a making
mA. position to the right (2nd module) current resistance of approximately 5
The control system (of the c)  Digital configurable output module A.
must be connected to a fused power  Digital input module with switch
supply, since the system voltage drops position to the left Pin Configuration of the X3 on the
to an unspecified value in the event of a  Digital input module with switch c Module
short-circuit. position to the right X3:1 24 V DC ground
 Analog output module with switch c
X3:2
position to the left (1st module) Communications line -
 Analog output module with switch c
X3:3
position to the right (2nd module) Communications line +

In practice, however, not all of the X3:4 24 V DC +

modules are required. At X3, the c can
Table
simply be supplied with 24 V
2-10
DC.

X8 on circ.-breaker clines c lines with RJ45 plugs Terminating resistor Power supply

If external c modules are to be connected to the SENTRON WL and a COM15 module is not available, the first
Fig.
connection must be made with four wires. The c can then be connected with the supplied c lines with RJ45
2-9
plugs, and the power supply connected to X3, as shown.

2-17

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 X8 on circ.-brk. clines COM15 c lines with RJ45 plugs Terminating resistor Power supply

If a COM15 module is available, the external c modules can be integrated in the system by connecting them to the
Fig.
c lines supplied. The end of the c must be fitted with a terminating resistor. The power supply unit can
2-10
simply be connected via the X3 interface.

DEVICE LED Meaning  The ZSI module must be the first

external module to be connected.
Red Internal fault in the c module
 If the BDA is connected to the front
Yellow c module in test mode interface of the trip unit, the cable
must be no longer than 0.5m.
Green Module in operation
LED Display
The DEVICE LED indicates the state of the external c module
Table The LEDs on the external c
2-11 modules enable straightforward
module diagnosis and testing. As
explained in Tables 2-11 to 2-13, the
c LED Meaning internal status and the communications
Green Connection exists to a different c module connection can be diagnosed to ensure
that they have been wired correctly.
Off No other c module detected

The c LEDs on the external c modules indicate whether

Table
communication is taking place with other modules. This enables straightforward
2-12
diagnosis.

All other LEDs Meaning

On the input module, this indicates a high signal at the
corresponding input. With digital output modules, the
Yellow output is active and the contact closed. With analog output
modules, a yellow LED indicates that the full-scale deflection
value has been exceeded by 20%.

Off The LED is gray if none of the above-mentioned conditions is

present
The LEDs indicate whether the outputs are set or the inputs are supplied with 24
Table
V DC and, therefore, have been activated.
2-13

2-18

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Testing the Digital Input and "Test" key several times in quick input, and the ZSI output can be
Output Modules succession switches the corresponding "forced" via the BDA and Switch ES
The test must be performed prior to any input or output on and off alternately. Power communication system; in other
commissioning work to determine With the input module, not only the words, the test mode can be activated
whether the circuit-breaker and its input LEDs but also the signals are via the communication system and the
components function properly. transmitted via the c and, if inputs and outputs overwritten for test
connected, the PROFIBUS. purposes.
The test mode can be used to check that
the c modules function With the digital outputs, the LEDs and The system exits the test mode
properly. A distinction must be made the associated outputs are switched automatically after 30 seconds if the
between the individual modules. through, thereby enabling the test key is not actuated or no changes
connected devices to be checked. have been made via the communication
Actuating the "Test" key on the system.
c module once starts the test The test mode of the analog output
mode, and all the inputs, outputs, and module and the ZSI module is described The test scenarios for the analog output
associated LEDs are deactivated. The in the chapter on the appropriate module and ZSI are explained in the
DEVICE LED changes from green to module. descriptions.
yellow. The inputs on the input module,
If the LED is switched on, actuating the outputs on the output module, the S

Checking the inputs and outputs on the digital input/output modules

Normal operating condition of the input/output module. The inputs/outputs
Normal operation are either on or off depending on the wiring or after existing messages.
4
The module switches to the test mode, as indicated by the yellow DEVICE LED.
Actuate the "Test" key
4
Actuating once selects input or output 1, as indicated by the green LED 1. The
Actuate the "Test" key output can then be switched on or off, and the on or off signal of the input can
4 be transmitted by actuating the "Test" key quickly (1s).

After a pause of more Input or output 2 selected. As with 1, the output can be switched by actuating
than 2s, actuate the "Test" the key quickly. With relay modules, you will be able to hear a click.
key. 4
After a pause of more Input or output 3 selected. With input modules, the presence of 24 V DC at the
than 2s, actuate the "Test" corresponding input is simulated and transmitted via the c.
key. 4
After a pause of more Input or output 4 selected. The selected input or output can be tested by
than 2s, actuate the "Test" quickly actuating the "Test" key.
key. 4
After a pause of more Input or output 5 selected. The selected input or output can be tested by
than 2s, actuate the "Test" quickly actuating the "Test" key.
key. 4
After a pause of more Input or output 6 selected. The selected input or output can be tested by
than 2s, actuate the "Test" quickly actuating the "Test" key.
key. 4
After a pause of more Overall LED test. If the "Test" key is not actuated within 5 seconds, the system
than 2s, actuate the "Test" exits test mode.
key. 4
The test procedure can start from the beginning
Actuate the "Test" key
within 5 seconds
4
The table shows the test procedure for checking the digital inputs and outputs on the c. If the "Test" key is not actuated
Table
within 30 seconds, the system exits test mode automatically.
2-14

2-19

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Digital Input Module Functional description of the parameter digital input module is set to "0"
set switchover (parameter set A), the active parameter
Functional description set in the trip unit switches to
The trip units ETU55B and ETU76B have
The digital input module enables up to two different parameter sets for the parameter set B. A switchover event to
six additional binary signals (24 V DC) to protection function. This function is parameter set A is not initiated on the
be connected. Signals, such as the state particularly important in the event of a c until the input on the
of a Buchholz relay, the open/closed power failure when an automatic digital input module is set first to "1" and
signal from the switchgear cabinet switchover is made from on-line to then back to "0".
door, or a signal indicating that a generator operation, a process which A maximum of two digital input
predefined temperature has been may involve all the release conditions modules can be operated
exceeded, can be transmitted directly changing. simultaneously on one c:
via the one as a module with the "Profibus
PROFIBUS-DP and processed at field bus The PROFIBUS-DP communication
system, the BDA, the ETU76B display, or input" position and the other as
level. "Parameter switch".
the digital input module can be used to
The status of an MCCB that is not switch between the two parameter sets.
directly communications capable or a
switch-disconnector can also be For this purpose, the first module input
transmitted on the PROFIBUS-DP. In is used in the "Parameter Switch"
conjunction with the configurable position on the rotary coding switch. If a
output module, these protection "1" signal is detected (LED on input 1 is
devices can also be connected to yellow), the switchover to parameter
provide a cost-effective alternative to set B is communicated to the trip unit. If
other solutions with additional the input signal switches back to "0", the
PROFIBUS-DP input/output modules. switchover to parameter set A is
communicated and the LED on input 1 is
A total of 6 inputs are available in the extinguished.
"Profibus input" switch position. Six
inputs are also available if the rotary Since the c is event
coding switch is in the "Parameter controlled, trip unit ETU55B or ETU76B
switch" position, although the first switches over to the other parameter
input causes the active parameter set to set when a swichover request is issued
switch over. If the connected ETU does via the c.
not have two parameter sets (e.g. This means that if a switchover is made
ETU45B), this input can also be used to parameter set B via the BDA, for
without any restrictions. example, even though the input on the

Technical data for the digital input module

Operating voltage on the c min./max. (V) 19.2/28.8
Current input from the c min./max. (mA) 29/43
No. of floating channels per digital input module 6
Voltage value for reliably detecting a "1" signal (V) >16V
Current input per input for a "1" signal (mA) 7.5
Voltage value for reliably detecting a "0" signal (V) <1V
Current input per input for a "0" signal (mA) 0
Max. no. of modules on one c 2
Power loss min./max. (W) 0.72/0.94
Dimensions W/H/D (mm) 70/86/95
Weight (kg) 0.223
Temperature range (°C) -20/60
This table provides accurate technical data for the digital input module on the The position of the rotary coding
Table Fig.
c switch determines the operating
2-15 2-13
mode.

2-20

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Digital Output Module to the left, outputs 1 to 6 are assigned Delay time
with Rotary Coding Switch the following event signals: As well as assigning the outputs, the
The digital output module can be used  1: Trip as a result of overload (L) rotary coding switch can be used to set
to output six items of binary  2: Short-term-delayed short-circuit an additional delay time. Available
information on the state of the trip (S) times are 0, 0.2 s, 0.5 s, 1 s, and 2 s.
circuit-breaker (warnings and trips) to  3: Instantaneous short-circuit trip (I) These can be used, for example, to
external signaling units (light, alarm  4: Ground-fault trip (G) suppress events that only last a short
horn), or to switch off specific system time and not output them until they
 5: Ground-fault alarm signal
components (frequency converters). have been present for a long period of
 6: Trip as a result of overload in the time (e.g. phase unbalance).
The load shedding and load restoring neutral conductor (N)
signals enable a load to be switched on Irrespective of the delay time that has
or off automatically depending on the Switch position to the right been set, the signal for the leading
work load of the circuit-breaker. This is overload trip, which can be used to
If the rotary coding switch is positioned prematurely switch off and protect
the first step towards efficient energy to the right, the 6 outputs are
management. connected frequency converters, is
automatically assigned the following always instantaneous.
The digital output module is available in functions:
two versions. The "optocoupler" version A maximum of two digital output
 1: Leading overload trip signal (delay
features "electronic relays", which can modules with rotary coding switches
time 0s)
only be used as make contacts. The can be operated simultaneously on one
 2: Trip unit fault (ETU) c. To this end, they must be
current carrying capacity of an output is
 3: Load shedding configured once in the operating mode
150 mA, and the maximum voltage is
24 V DC. Only direct voltage can be  4: Load restoring with the switch position to the left and
switched. The "relay" version, however,  5: Temperature alarm once with the switch position to the
uses a changeover contact with a  6: Current phase unbalance right.
maximum load of 12 A. Voltages of up The LEDs display the current state of the
to 230 V and alternating voltage are 6 outputs. If the LED is off, the
possible. The relay contacts are floating. corresponding output is not set. If the
The module is configured using a rotary LED is yellow, the output is active.
coding switch, which not only selects
one of the two output module versions,
but also sets the appropriate delay time.

Switch position to the left

If the rotary coding switch is positioned

Technical data for the digital output module with the rotary coding switch
Operating voltage on the c min./max. (V) 19.2/28.8
Current input from the c min./max. (mA) optocoupler 29/63
Current input from the c min./max. (mA) relay 29/250
No. of floating channels per digital output module (optocoupler
6
outputs are non-floating)
Max. current for optocoupler output with 24 V DC (mA) 100
Max. current for relay output with 24 V DC/250 V AC/250 V DC (A) 10/10/0.25
Max. no. of modules on one c 2
Power loss min./max. (W) 0.74/5.4
Dimensions W/H/D (mm) 70/86/95
Weight (kg) optocoupler/relay 0.223/0.321
Temperature range (°C) -20/60
This table provides accurate technical data for the digital output module with Switch positioned to left/right
Table Fig.
rotary coding switch on the c selects events in dark-gray /
2-16 2-14
light-gray fields.

2-21

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Digital Configurable Output These events are available for the digital, configurable output module (part 1)
Module
Circuit-breaker on
The digital configurable output module
Circuit-breaker off
also has six outputs. Like the digital
output module with the rotary coding Storage spring charged
switch, it is available with optocoupler Ready to switch on
Status
and relay outputs. Group warning
Unlike the modules with the rotary Group trip
coding switch, however, the outputs are
PROFIBUS write protection active
assigned using a software tool rather
than a selector switch. Switch ES Power PROFIBUS communication OK
and the BDA are used as configuration Overload
software. Both tools feature a separate Overload in N-conductor
node - 'Config. Output Module' - in the
Load shedding
navigation tree, which enables the
outputs to be assigned the events in the Load restoring
Alarms
table opposite using drop-down fields. Ground-fault alarm

The first three module outputs can be Overtemperature

assigned up to six events, which are ETU fault
ORed with the output. This triggers, for Phase unbalance - current
example, a type of group signal when
Overload (L)
the circuit-breaker is either in an
overload excitation state or a phase Short-time-delay short-circuit (S)
unbalance warning is present. Instantaneous short-circuit (I)
The last three outputs can only be Ground fault (G)
assigned one of the events directly. Overload in neutral conductor
Configuration events include status Phase unbalance - current
signals, warnings, tripped signals,
Phase unbalance - voltage
setpoint violation signals, waveform
buffer triggers, the active parameter Underfrequency
Trips
set, and bits that can be addressed Overfrequency
directly via PROFIBUS. Undervoltage
The module outputs can be set directly Overvoltage
via the PROFIBUS-DP (e.g. from a PLC) Active power in normal direction
using the PROFIBUS-DP bits, which are
Active power in reverse direction
transmitted to byte position 13 via data
set 69. Switchgear that is not directly Total harmonic distortion - current
communications capable can be Total harmonic distortion - voltage
integrated in a communications system Reversal of phase rotation direction
in conjunction with the digital input
PROFIBUS bit 1
module.
PROFIBUS bit 2
PROFIBUS bit 3
PROFIBUS output bits
PROFIBUS bit 4
PROFIBUS bit 5
PROFIBUS bit 6
Parameter set A active
Active parameter set
Parameter set B active
The events in this table (part 1) and the following table (part 2) are available on
Table
the c. These can be output via the configurable digital output
2-17
module.

2-22

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 The status can be read via the input These events are available for the digital, configurable output module (part 2)
module, which means that a motorized
Overcurrent
drive could be switched on or off via the
digital configurable output module. Overcurrent in neutral conductor
Many other applications are, however, Overcurrent - ground fault
also possible. Phase unbalance - current
Unlike the digital output module with Phase unbalance - voltage
the rotary coding switch, a time delay
Demand - current
cannot be added to the event. A
setpoint can be output with a delay via Undervoltage
the digital configurable output module, Overvoltage
for example, if the setpoint itself is Total harmonic distortion - current
already delayed.
Total harmonic distortion - voltage
Like the digital output module with the Crest factor
rotary coding switch, this module also
Form factor
indicates the status of the outputs via Setpoints
the labelled LEDs. Underfrequency
Overfrequency
Active power in normal direction
Active power in reverse direction
Apparent power
Reactive power in normal direction
Reactive power in reverse direction
Power factor capazitiv
Power factor inductive
Demand - active power
Demand - reactive power
Demand - apparent power
Waveform buffer A
Trigger event
Waveform buffer B
Part 2 of the table shows all the events on the c that can be output via
Table
the digital configurable output module. Configuration is carried out using Switch
2-18
ES Power or the BDA.

Technical data for the digital configurable output module

Operating voltage on the c min./max. (V) 19.2/28.8
Current input from the c min./max. (mA) 29/39 (250Rel.)
No. of floating channels per digital output module (optocoupler
6
outputs are non-floating)
Max. current for optocoupler output with 24 V (mA) 100
Max. current for relay output with 24 V DC/250 V AC/250 V DC (A) 10/10/0.25
Max. no. of modules on one c 1
Power loss min./typ./max. (W) 0.74/5.4
Dimensions W/H/D (mm) 70/86/95
Weight (kg) optocoupler/relay 0.223/0.321
Temperature range (°C) -20/60
The outputs can only be This table provides accurate technical data for the digital configurable output
Fig. Table
configured using appropriate module on the c
2-15 2-19
software.

2-23

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Analog Output Module interpreted. The value of the rating plug classified in a value range, as shown in
The analog output module can be used currently implemented must be used for the table below.
to output the most important measured this purpose. Before the full-scale deflection can be
values issued via the c to The maximum value is calculated by determined from the table, the
analog indicators (e.g. moving-coil multiplying the value of the rating plug calculated value must be multiplied by 3
instruments) in the switchgear cabinet by 1.2 and then rounding the result up for the total apparent power and the
door. Each analog output module has to the nearest 100. total active power (position f).
four channels for this purpose. The Example: With a rating plug of 1600A, Example: IR = 1600A, rated voltage =
signals are available at two physical the full-scale value of the moving-coil 400 V; -> full-scale deflection =
interfaces: a 4...20 mA and a 0...10 V instrument must be 2000A (1600 x 1.2 1,000,000 W
interface. = 1920 -> 2000A). In other words,
The measured values can be picked off 0V/4mA = 0A, 10V/20mA = 2000A. Switch position "f"
as 0...10 V via the X4 connector on the Since it can generally be assumed that
c module (the 4...20 mA Switch position "U" the frequency will be the same across
interface is available at X5). Both output When the rotary coding switch is in the three phases in all the networks,
forms are always active at the same switch position "U", the following switch position "f’"is used to provide a
time. voltages are applied to the four analog general overview by outputting the
The measured values, which are output outputs: most important measured values (with
via the four channels, are selected using A01: Phase-to-phase voltage U L12 the exception of the current values). In
a rotary coding switch. The output A02: Phase-to-phase voltage U L23 conjunction with another module in
forms I, U, P, f, and cos are available. A03: Phase-to-phase voltage U L31 position "I", all the most important
Up to two analog output modules can A04: Phase voltage UL1N measured values can be displayed in
be operated on one c. The In most cases, the phase-to-phase this way.
selection panel on the rotary coding voltage is output at the switchgear
switch is divided vertically. If the switch cabinet doors. This is why the first three
Power value ranges [W/VA]
is set to a value on the left, the module channels are assigned these measured
values. If the voltage is required From To FSD
is automatically addressed as module 1.
If a second module exists, it must be set between a phase and the neutral 0 50,000 50,000
to a value on the right. This is the only conductor, this is available via output 50,000 100,000 100,000
way to ensure that two analog output four.
100,000 200,000 200,000
modules can operate simultaneously. The full-scale deflection for the
200,000 300,000 300,000
All types of moving-coil instrument with moving-coil instrument is calculated by
multiplying the rated voltage of the 300,000 500,000 500,000
an internal resistance of more than
20 k (as a voltage output) and network (primary voltage of the voltage 500,000 1,000,000 1,000,000
between 50 and 250 (as a current transformer) by 1.1 and then rounding 1,000,000 2,000,000 2,000,000
output) can be used as an indicator. the result up to the nearest 50.
2,000,000 3,000,000 3,000,000
The LEDs for the channels are yellow if Example: If the rated voltage of the
3,000,000 5,000,000 5,000,000
the current value exceeds the full-scale network is 400 V, the full-scale value is
450 V 5,000,000 10,000,000 10,000,000
deflection by 20% (with U, I, and P),
(400 V x 1.1 = 440V -> 450V). 10,000,000 20,000,000 20,000,000
cos is greater than 0.8, or the
frequency greater than 45 Hz. Switch position "P" 20,000,000 30,000,000

Switch position "I" If the rotary coding switch is set to After multiplication, the
Table
full-scale deflection of the power
In switch position "I", the measured position "P", the power measured values 2-20
is sorted into value ranges.
current values are output linearly: are output via the four channels:
A01: Active power phase PL1 A01: Network frequency
A01: Current in phase IL1
A02: Active power phase P L2 A02: Mean value of the phase-to-phase
A02: Current in phase IL2
A03: Active power phase P L3 voltages
A03: Current in phase IL3
A04: Total apparent power Sges A03: Total active power
A04: Current in the neutral conductor
The full-scale deflection of the active A04: Mean value of the power factors
Since the circuit-breaker can be
power in each phase is calculated by The scale for displaying the frequency
designed for different rated currents,
multiplying the value of the rating plug must range from 45 Hz to 65 Hz. This
the full-scale value must be scaled
by the rated voltage of the network. The enables the standard frequencies in
automatically and the maximum output
full-scale deflection value is then countries where IEC and UL standards
value of the analog output module

2-24

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 apply to be displayed. output 1, which is indicated by LED  If the "TEST" key is not actuated within
Example: 45 Hz = 0 V/4 mA and 65 Hz = A01. The test output signal is output. 30 seconds after an output has been
10 V/20 mA. For currents, voltages, and power selected, the system exits the test
rating values, this is equivalent to the mode automatically and returns to the
The scalings of the other measured full-scale value, with cos 1 and with standard operating mode. The values,
values can be read in the appropriate a frequency of 55Hz. which are constantly updated in the
switch positions. background, are then output at the
 Actuating the key again selects output
Switch position "cos " 2, which is indicated by LED A02. This outputs again.
automatically deletes the value at
The following measured values are
output 1 and sets the value at output
output in switch position "cos ":
2.
A01: Power factor cos L1
A02: Power factor cos L2  By repeating the above steps, the
A03: Power factor cos L3 wiring and scaling of all four outputs
A04: Phase unbalance - current (%) can be checked one after the other.
The power factors are displayed from  Selecting output A04 and actuating
0.7 (leading) (= 0 V/4 mA) through 1 the "TEST" key activates all four LEDs,
(= 5 V/12 mA) to 0.7 (lagging) (= 10 but does not output an output.
V/20 mA). The phase unbalance of the Actuating the key again selects output
three currents is displayed from 0% (0 1 again.
V/4 mA) to 50% (10 V/20 mA).
Ensure that the polarity is correct during
connection.

Test function
The test mode is started by actuating
the "TEST" key and indicated by the
yellow DEVICE LED. Although the
measured values continue to be
updated in the test mode, they are not
output at their respective channels.
 The test mode is started by actuating
the "TEST" key.
 Actuating the "TEST" key again selects

Technical data for the analog output module

Operating voltage on the c min./max. (V) 19.2/28.8
Current input from the c min./max. (mA) 63/150

Internal resistance of moving-coil instrument - min./max. voltage 20k

Internal resistance of moving-coil instrument - min./max. current 20/250

Max. no. of modules on one c 2
Power loss min./typ./max. (W) 0.74/5.4
Dimensions W/H/D (mm) 70/86/95
Weight (kg) 0.223/0.321
Temperature range (°C) -20/60
The analog channels are This table provides accurate technical data for the analog output module on the
Fig. Table
selected using the rotary coding c
2-11 2-21
switch

2-25

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 ZSI Module Operating principle programmed delay time of tZSI of 50 ms
To use the ZSI function with the If the ZSI module is used in a has elapsed.
SENTRON WL circuit-breaker, the distribution system comprising several Example as illustrated in Graphic 6.
external c ZSI module must grading levels, each circuit-breaker
be implemented. affected by a short-circuit interrogates This shows a section of a power
the circuit-breaker directly downstream distribution system that has been fitted
The zone selective interlocking (ZSI) with the ZSI module. Both SENTRON VL
module provides the complete range of of it to ascertain whether the
short-circuit also occurred in the next and SENTRON WL circuit-breakers are
selectivity with the extremely short implemented at different grading
delay time of tZSI = 50 ms, irrespective of grading level below:
levels.
the number of grading levels and the  If the short-circuit did occur in the
location of the short-circuit in the downstream grading level, the Short-circuit at 3:
distribution system. Its benefits become upstream circuit-breaker delays Circuit-breakers -Q5, -Q3, and -Q1
even more apparent the higher the tripping to ensure that the establish that a short-circuit has
number of grading levels in large circuit-breaker directly upstream of occurred. -Q5 blocks -Q3 by means of
systems and the longer the resulting the short-circuit has enough time to the ZSI signal and, as a result, -Q1 too so
delay times for standard time grading. interrupt the short-circuit. that they do not trip in 50 ms. Since -Q5
 If the circuit-breakers in the does not receive a blocking signal from
By shortening the break time, the ZSI a subordinate circuit-breaker, it itself is
module significantly reduces stress and downstream grading level do not report
a short-circuit, the short-circuit responsible for interrupting the
damage in the event of a short-circuit in short-circuit as quickly as possible. If this
the switchgear. occurred between the two grading
levels in question. In this case, one of does not take place because, for
the two upstream circuit-breakers example, the circuit-breaker is no
interrupts the short-circuit once the longer operational due to an
overcurrent, -Q3, as a backup, trips after

X4 3
SENTRON WL 4
ZSI

-Q1 5
ts=300ms 6

1
X4 3 X14 1
SENTRON WL SENTRON VL
COM10

4 2
ZSI

-Q2 5 -Q3 7
ts =200ms 6 ts =150ms 8
2
X14 1 X14 1
SENTRON VL SENTRON VL
COM10

COM10

2 2
-Q4 7 -Q5 7
t s=60ms 8 ts=80ms 8

This graphic illustrates the operating principle of the ZSI function using an example in a power distribution system. It is also a
Graphic
connection diagram that shows how the ZSI module must be wired if the SENTRON VL and SENTRON WL circuit-breakers are used.
2-6

2-26

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 the time-discriminating response time If a coupling switch is used in the power Active inputs and outputs are indicated
of 150 ms. distribution system, this can also be by a yellow LED.
Short-circuit at 2: equipped with the ZSI function and The ZSI signal should be transmitted via
-Q1 and -Q3 establish that a integrated in the overall concept. a signal lead twisted in pairs with a
short-circuit has occurred; -Q5 does not. Up to 8 circuit-breakers can be cross-section of at least 0.75mm2, and
For this reason, -Q3 does not receive a connected to ZSI IN, and up to 20 to ZSI no more than 400 m long.
blocking signal from -Q5, but provides a OUT. Recommended lead type:
blocking signal for -Q1. This information The ZSI module must always be the first Siemens shielded measuring and
tells -Q3 that it is closest to the external c module to be control lead LSYCY (2 x 0.75mm2)
short-circuit and trips with a delay of tS connected to the COM15 module or to
= 50 ms instead of tsd = 150 ms. Time X8.
saved = 100ms.
Short-circuit at 1: Test function
Only -Q1 establishes that a short-circuit The outputs are set (that is, a blocking
has occurred and does not receive a signal is sent to other circuit-breakers)
blocking signal from a subordinate when the rotary coding switch is set to
grading level. For this reason, it trips "TEST".
after tZSI = 50 ms. Time saved = 250 ms. Actuating the "TEST" key switches the
The ZSI function can be used for ZSI module to test mode, which is
short-circuits between the phases (S), indicated by the yellow DEVICE
with respect to ground (G), or for both LED. The inputs and outputs are
simultaneously (S+G). The operating selected in the same way as the digital
mode is set using the rotary coding input/output modules. When the ZSI
switch. If the switch is in the "OFF" module input is selected, the input can
position, the ZSI is deactivated. be toggled internally by actuating and
The ZSI module also provides the releasing the TEST key. When the
blocking signal for the medium-voltage outputs are selected, the outputs can be
level. toggled by actuating and releasing the
TEST key. This enables the wiring to be
The hardware design of the ZSI module checked.
is compatible with the COM10 module
of the SENTRON VL (in which the ZSI
function is implemented) and the
3WN6.
Technical data for the ZSI module
Operating voltage on the c min./max. (V) 19.2/28.8
Current input from the c min./max. (mA) 31/61
Automatic output reset after no more than... 3s
Shortest time blocking signal can be present at the outputs LV 100ms
Shortest time blocking signal can be present at the outputs MV 500ms
Standard trip time (incl. all delays) approx. 80ms
Max. no. of circuit-breakers connectable to ZSI IN 8
Max. no. of circuit-breakers connectable to ZSI OUT 20
Max. no. of modules on one c 1

Max. lead length for 2 x 0.75mm2 400m

Power loss min./typ./max. (W) 0.8/1.76
Dimensions W/H/D (mm) 70/86/95
Weight (kg) 0.223
Temperature range (°C) -20/60
The function of the ZSI module This table provides accurate technical data for the ZSI module on the
Fig. Table
is selected using the rotary c
2-12 2-22
coding switch

2-27

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 This diagram consists of two parts: the top half is a connection diagram, which also shows how the ZSI function must be
Graphic
connected to 3WN6 with several supplies and outgoing circuits. The bottom half shows the circuitry when a coupling switch is
2-7
used.

2-28

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com
 PROFIBUS Communication with
SENTRON WL and SENTRON VL

How to integrate the circuit breakers into plc´s

PROFIBUS Profile for the SENTRON circuit breaker

Data transmission via DPV1

Diagnostic

Programming samples

4
PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com
 PROFIBUS-DP Communication with
SENTRON WL and SENTRON VL
Integration in an Automation System
A wide range of options are available for integrating SENTRON environment. In this respect, the
COM15 and COM10 modules behave in
circuit-breakers in automation systems. Newcomers to the system will, in exactly the same way as far as the
particular, appreciate the straightforward and quick start-up options, PROFIBUS-DP is concerned. One
advantage of this is that a joint device
while professional users will find that the flexible mechanisms meet all master file (GSD) can be used for
integration in PROFIBUS-DP systems for
their requirements. In addition, a joint profile (data transmission type and all circuit-breakers from 16 A to 6300 A.
content) for SENTRON WL and SENTRON VL enables identical programs to A distinction cannot and does not have
to be drawn. Of course, with an
be used at the automation and PC level. identical PROFIBUS-DP profile, the
circuit-breaker that is addressed can be
accurately identified (e.g. device
Communication Options module for the SENTRON WL and the description, order number, inspection
The previous chapters provided a brief COM10 module for the SENTRON VL. date, and so on).
description of the PROFIBUS-DP COM15 Both modules act as interfaces between
the circuit-breakers and the information

This diagram shows a chart of the different communication options. A class 1 master is the "configuration master", which
Graphic
transmits either the settings from the GSD file or the Object Manager to the slave during start-up.
4-1

4-1

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Another major advantage of a joint Integration with the GSD File You can, of course, also control
communication profile is that the same You can download a constantly updated parameter settings using the S7
software can be used for the version of the GSD file for SENTRON program. A range of system functions
automation systems, PCs, and operator circuit-breakers from the PROFIBUS-DP are available here to transmit data
control and monitoring software (e.g. homepage at: records to the slave via the DPV1
WinCC). channel.
http://www.profibus.com
The profile is based on the Creating a master system
circuit-breaker profile as defined and Enter "sentron" in the QuickSearch field.
standardized by the PROFIBUS User The device parameters are configured You first have to create a DP master
Organization. using a configuration tool, which is system using the HWConfig editor.
available with every PROFIBUS-DP  Assign a master address between
Communication with a master. If you are using a SIMATIC S7 as 1-125 (e.g. 11)
PROFIBUS-DP Class 1 Master the master, this is the HWConfig tool  Select the required transmission rate
A class 1 master is the "configuration provided with the SIMATIC STEP7 (e.g. 1.5 Mbit/s)
master", which, during start-up, package. If you are not using a  Select the PROFIBUS-DP profile
determines the mode that the slave is to SIMATIC S7, configuration can be
Note: Depending on the PROFIBUS-DP
use for communication. In most cases, a carried out, for example, with COM
configuration, you may have to make
class 1 master is a PLC, such as a PROFIBUS, depending on the master.
further settings in the master system.
SIMATIC S7 with a PROFIBUS-DP Installing the GSD file These will not be explained here,
interface. however.
If you have not yet installed the GSD file,
The following tools are available for which contains the master data for the Inserting and addressing the slave
configuration: circuit-breaker, you have to integrate it
 GSD file First select "SENTRON WL/VL" in the
in the configuration tool beforehand.
"Hardware Catalog" and drag it to the
 Object Manager You can use the hardware configuration master system.
A detailed description of both methods editor "HWConfig" to integrate the GSD
Note: When the 'SENTRON WL/VL' slave
is provided on the following pages. file in the SIMATIC development
is selected, only a machine-readable
It must always be possible, however, to environment. To do so, open the
product designation number (e.g.
integrate an additional communication "Hardware" object in the SIMATIC
3WL9111-0AT15-0AA0) is displayed for
system with DPV1 and read or write Manager and select "Install new GSD ..."
information purposes. This does not
data records acyclically, irrespective of from "Extras". You then have to select
affect the system function.
the method chosen. the source (e.g. disk) and the
'Siem80C0.gs*' file. The placeholder You then have to select a basic type,
('*') stands for the relevant language which you confirm with OK.
Communication with a
PROFIBUS-DP Class 2 Master index (g = German, e = English). Once To run the slave on the PROFIBUS-DP,
you have completed this step, SENTRON you still have to assign and set a unique
PCs with PROFIBUS-DP cards are usually WL/VL is available for further address on this PROFIBUS-DP line.
class 2 masters (e.g. when Switch ES configuration in the hardware catalog
Power is used). If the properties are to be changed,
under "PROFIBUS-DP\Other field
select the slave and choose "Properties -
Communication with a class 2 master devices\Switchgear".
DP slave".
always takes place via DPV1. Note: The GSD file can be used for both
the DP standard and extended data
exchange with DPV1. You cannot set
device-specific parameters using the
PROFIBUS-DP during start-up.
If this is necessary, however, SENTRON
WL/VL must be integrated as an S7 slave
using the Switch ES Power Object
Manager.

4-2

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 You can use the STEP7 hardware configuration tool to configure the S7 automation system and its field buses. To add a SENTRON
Fig.
circuit-breaker, you have to configure either a CPU with an integrated PROFIBUS-DP interface or a PROFIBUS-DP CP card in the rack
4-1
and then assign it to the PROFIBUS-DP.

Note: You do not have to take the

settings on the "Hex parameterization"
tab page into account here. You cannot
assign the PROFIBUS-DP addresses 0
and 126. Address 0 is for the PG (class 2
master), while 126 is mainly used for
commissioning and as the "as shipped"
status of DP slaves.
Integrating the SENTRON circuit-breaker
using the GSD file means that it is
always integrated as a standard DP
slave. You can, however, also transmit
other data and change parameters
quickly and easily via DPV1.

After you have dragged & dropped the SENTRON VL/WL from the device library,
Fig.
the system displays this pop-up. You have to select the circuit-breaker basic type,
4-2
which the PLC uses to configure the circuit-breaker.

4-3

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Once you have selected the basic type, a SENTRON circuit-breaker icon appears next to the PROFIBUS-DP. In the lower part of the
Fig.
split window, you can/must set the S7 input/output address that can be accessed in the STEP7 program.
4-3

Integration with the Switch ES SIMATIC S7, this data is transmitted and module
Power Object Manager sent to the slaves. Using the Object Manager, therefore,
Note: For information on the program A hybrid configuration comprising the ensures that all the settings for the
and how to install Switch ES Power and GSD file and the Switch ES Power Object automation process and the
the Object Manager, see Chapter 6. Manager is supported by a SIMATIC S7. PROFIBUS-DP, as well as those for the
Integration with the Object Manager is power distribution system, are stored in
Benefits of the Object Manager a joint database. This means that the
only possible using a SIMATIC S7
controller with STEP7 software. If a SENTRON circuit-breaker is right information is always available in
HWConfig does not have to contain a integrated in a PROFIBUS-DP system the right place.
GSD file when configuration is carried using the GSD file, only the basic type This is particularly important, for
out using the Switch ES Power Object information and the PROFIBUS-DP example, when a circuit-breaker is
Manager. During installation, the Object address is saved in the STEP7 database replaced. After the new circuit-breaker
Manager adds the PROFIBUS devices it and transmitted to the slave during has been installed and the c
recognizes to the HWConfig hardware start-up. power supply switched on again, it
catalog, which means that you can When the Object Manager is used, all automatically receives all the data and
make all the settings using the Object the parameters set in Switch ES Power parameters from the SIMATIC that were
Manager. are saved in the STEP7 database and set previously using the Switch ES
To parameterize the SENTRON transmitted to the circuit-breaker during Power Object Manager, thereby
circuit-breaker, double-click the Object start-up. These include: significantly reducing downtime.
Manager in HWConfig. Once it has  Measured value parameters Integration in the STEP7 database and
started, all the PROFIBUS-DP-relevant  Protection parameters automatic parameterization ensures
settings for the SENTRON are  Extended protection function that the SENTRON circuit-breakers
automatically set to the required values. parameters conform to the Totally Integrated
Other device parameters can be set  Setpoint parameters Automation (TIA) concept.
afterwards.
 Identification data
When you return to HWConfig, the  Communication parameters (e.g. the
parameters that have been set are data selected in the cyclic channel)
copied to the HWConfig database.
 Settings for the configurable output
When the project is imported to the

4-4

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 The 3-stage communication concept not only enables quick and easy access, but also ensures that the system can be adapted for
Graphic
more complex demands. Step 1 is mandatory; steps 2 and 3 optional.
4-2

The 3-Step Communication Concept class. Step 3

This concept provides quick and easy In step 3, acyclic data records can, if
access to the PROFIBUS-DP
Step 2 required, be read or written by a class 1
communication system with SENTRON The cyclic data contains certain or class 2 master. This is useful for
circuit-breakers. predefined content. It can be changed requesting a large volume of data, for
in the three basic types and, therefore, example. It does not have to be read
Step 1 easily adapted to prevailing cyclically (e.g. waveform memory data).
Step 1 provides quick and easy access to requirements (e.g. replacing Switch ES Power uses this step to
the PROFIBUS-DP communication phase-to-phase voltage UL12 with the communicate with the circuit-breaker.
system. This step already includes number of operating hours). This is an
sufficient data to fulfill most additional option to step 1.
requirements. Communication in step 1
is always carried out with a master 1

4-5

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Setting the PROFIBUS Address for
the COM10/COM15 Modules
The PROFIBUS-DP addresses are stored
in the PROFIBUS-DP modules COM10
and COM15 of the circuit-breakers. The
system is shipped with the default
address 126. All the stations on the
PROFIBUS-DP must have a unique
address, which means that a new
address must be assigned when the
PROFIBUS-DP modules are
commissioned.
The COM10 module of the SENTRON VL
adopts the new address. The old
address, however, remains valid until
the connection with a class 1 master is You can set the PROFIBUS address and the content of cyclic data transmission
Fig.
interrupted. If no cyclic data exchange is using Switch ES Power.
4-4
taking place with a class 1 master, the
new address becomes effective
immediately. With Switch ES Power, the
process is as follows: While the
parameters are being downloaded with
a new address, the address is copied
and activated and, as a result, the
connection with Switch ES Power is
interrupted immediately. As of this
point, the slave can be accessed at the
new address and Switch ES Power must
be restarted.
The COM15 module of the SENTRON WL
adopts the new address, although it
cannot be used until the 24 V DC supply
voltage for the c has been
interrupted briefly. The address is not
You can also set the same communication parameters using the BDA, as well as
active until the voltage is restored. Fig.
the parameters for operation on the Ethernet/intranet/Internet.
4-5
Changing the address with
Switch ES Power
To change the PROFIBUS-DP address
using Switch ES Power, you first have to
ensure that the current address (e.g.
126 at initial commissioning) has only
been assigned once. For this reason, all
of the new COM10/COM15 modules
must never be connected to the
PROFIBUS-DP at the same time,
otherwise all modules with the same
address would adopt the new one. It is,
therefore, important to ensure that the
new modules are connected to the
PROFIBUS-DP one after the other and
addressed individually.
You can also use STEP7 to change the PROFIBUS address. To do so, however, the PC
Fig.
with STEP7 must be connected to the slave by means of an MPI or PROFIBUS
4-6
interface.

4-6

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 To change the address, select the "Open the SIMATIC Manager or in HWConfig in Changing the COM10 module
online" option in the "Switchgear" the STEP7 software package. To change (SENTRON VL) address with the LCD
menu. In the dialog box that then the address, choose the "Assign menu
appears, use the relevant application PROFIBUS address" option in the "Target The PROFIBUS-DP address of the COM10
access point and the selected system" menu in either of the programs. module can also be read and changed
PROFIBUS-DP interface to select the A window is then displayed that enables locally using the LCD ETU menu of the
PROFIBUS-DP slave address that is you to change the DP slave addresses SENTRON VL. To do so, open the menu
currently active and that you want to once the system has recognized the from the current display with ESC and
change. With new PROFIBUS-DP stations that are connected. then ENTER. Use the Up/Down keys to
COM10/COM15 modules, you have to The address can only be changed in the select the "Change setpoints" option
select 126. When you click OK, all the Wait_Prm status; in other words, the and then "Com change address". You
parameters, including the slave must not be cyclically connected can then use the Up/Down keys to set
communication parameters, are loaded to a class 1 master. The address is then and confirm the address.
from the device to Switch ES Power, changed immediately.
where they can then be changed. Select
the "Communication" option in the tree Changing the address via DR160
on the right-hand side and search for The PROFIBUS-DP address of the
the new address in the drop-down field. appropriate slave is located in data
Then choose the "Load to switchgear" record 160 at byte position 5. This can
option in the "Target system" menu. This not only be read but also changed by
transmits all the parameters currently writing the DR160; in other words, the
displayed in Switch ES Power to the address can be changed by triggering a
switchgear. single job to write the DR160 acyclically
Caution: If the PROFIBUS write in the PLC user program. See also the
protection is active on the example at the end of this chapter.
COM10/COM15 modules, the changes Changing the COM15 module
you make to the address are rejected. (SENTRON WL) address with the
Changing the address via the BDA or ETU76B
BDA Plus (see also Chapter 6) With its structured menu, the ETU76B
Once a connection with the can also be used to change the
circuit-breaker has been established PROFIBUS-DP address. To do so, first exit
(e.g. via a local point-to-point (PPP) the "screensaver" displaying the current
communication system or the values by pressing ESC twice. Pressing
Ethernet), choose "Device parameters - ESC once (or any one of the other three
Circuit-Breaker - Communication" (as keys) activates the backlight, and
with Switch ES Power) and change the pressing it twice calls up the main
address here. Unlike access via the menu. You then use the Up/Down keys
PROFIBUS-DP, it does not matter to choose the "Change parameters"
whether the PROFIBUS-DP write option. Confirm your selection by
protection is on or off. As described in pressing ENTER. Choose "PROFIBUS" in
Chapter 6, write actions from the BDA to the "Communication" sub-menu.
the circuit-breaker are password
protected. The changes become The ETU76B display also
Fig.
effective when the correct password is enables you to change the
4-7
entered. communication parameters

Changing the address via STEP7

(Set_Slave_Address)
Both PROFIBUS-DP modules support the
PROFIBUS-DP function Set_Slave_Add.
This class 2 master function can be used
to change the address of a PROFIBUS-DP You can set the address via the
Fig.
slave. 4-8
LCD ETU menu of the SENTRON
VL circuit-breaker.
The address can be changed either in

4-7

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 PROFIBUS communication with
SENTRON WL and SENTRON VL
PROFIBUS Profile for SENTRON Circuit-Breakers
The PROFIBUS User Organization promotes the use of joint, multi-vendor Note: Data that is not required all the
time can also be transmitted via DPV1.
profiles for different device classes, such as motor starters and measuring

instruments. For low-voltage switchgear and controlgear, a separate PROFIBUS User Organization Profile
The PROFIBUS-DP communication
profile has been defined for circuit-breakers. This forms the basis for the profile for the SENTRON circuit-breakers
joint PROFIBUS profile for the SENTRON VL and SENTRON WL was included in the profile for
low-voltage switchgear and controlgear
circuit-breakers. The PROFIBUS User Organization profile has been (circuit-breakers) by the PROFIBUS User
Organization and adopted accordingly.
extended to include diagnostic functions and DPV1 enhancements.
As a result, both SENTRON
circuit-breakers communicate using
Cyclic Data Transmission Basic Types for Cyclic Data state-of-the-art technology.
With cyclic data transmission, a defined Transmission The document can be downloaded from
quantity of user data is transmitted with Because of the large amount of data the PROFIBUS User Organization at:
each message. When the slave (in this provided by SENTRON circuit-breakers, a http://www.profibus.com
case, the SENTRON WL or SENTRON VL) compromise had to be reached between
is parameterized, the quantity of data to the data volume and performance on
be transmitted cyclically between the the PROFIBUS-DP. If only a small amount
circuit-breaker and PLC must be defined. of information is used every time a large
Cyclic data transmission is the best amount of data is transmitted in each
method of transferring information that exchange (Data_Exchange), the
is needed quickly and on a continuous performance of the PROFIBUS-DP can be
basis. The interval between two values affected.
depends on the number of stations For this reason, three base types are
involved, the quantity of data, and the available to enable efficient and flexible
baud rate. data transmission. Depending on the
The quantity of data cannot be changed application, the most suitable base type
during operation. For this reason, data and accompanying bus configuration
transmission that is exclusively cyclic is can be selected during configuration.
suitable for communication that This is carried out using a
generally handles small volumes of user PROFIBUS-DP configuration tool, such
data. Cyclic data transmission, however, as COM PROFIBUS or HWConfig in
is not suitable when larger data SIMATIC S7. The base types are
packages are to be transmitted, for pre-assigned and enable rapid
example, for occasional setting and commissioning without the need for
maintenance checks. additional configuration or
This capacity, which is only required parameterization.
occasionally, would, therefore, have to A user-defined configuration can, of
be taken into account for each message. course, also be created within a base
As a result, the messages would become type using Switch ES Power or the BDA.
very long and take a long time to
transmit.

SENTRON WL and VL conform to

Fig.
the PROFIBUS profile for
4-9
circuit-breakers as elaborated by

4-8

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Byte Definition of basic type 1 Byte Definition of basic type 2 Byte Definition of basic type 3
0/1 Binary status information 0/1 Binary status information 0/1 Binary status information
2/3 Data block 1 2/3 Data block 1 2/3 Data block 1
4/5 Data block 2 4/5 Data block 2 4/5 Data block 2
6/7 Data block 3 6/7 Data block 3 6/7 Data block 3
8/9 Data block 4 8/9 Data block 4 8/9 Data block 4
10 PB from data block 1 10/11 Data block 5 10/11 Data block 5
11 PB from data block 2 12/13 Data block 6 12/13 Data block 6
12 PB from data block 3 14/15 Data block 7 14/15 Data block 7
13 PB from data block 4 16/17 Data block 8 16/17 Data block 8
basic type 1 comprises the 18 PB from data block 1 18/19 Data block 9
Table
binary status information and
4-1 19 PB from data block 2 20/21 Data block 10
four data blocks
20 PB from data block 3 22/23 Data block 11
21 PB from data block 4 24/25 Data block 12
22 PB from data block 5 26/27 Data block 13
23 PB from data block 6 28/29 Data block 14
24 PB from data block 7 30 PB from data block 1
25 PB from data block 8 31 PB from data block 2
Each data block has its own 32 PB from data block 3
Table
property byte
4-2 33 PB from data block 4
34 PB from data block 5
35 PB from data block 6
36 PB from data block 7
37 PB from data block 8
38 PB from data block 9
39 PB from data block 10
40 PB from data block 11
41 PB from data block 12
42 PB from data block 13
43 PB from data block 14
Byte 44 of basic type 3
Table
contains PLC input data
4-3

4-9

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Pre-Assignment of the Three Basic the SENTRON VL and/or the SENTRON data blocks are followed by the
Types WL without a measurement function. accompanying property bytes. Each
Once a basic type has been selected data block has its own property byte.
Basic type 2
with the PROFIBUS-DP master The property byte provides additional
configuration tool, the configured slave Basic type 2 comprises 8 data blocks, information on the accompanying data
is requested by the master to which are pre-assigned for a SENTRON block. Although it does not have to be
communicate in the set basic type at WL with a measurement function. Not analyzed, it may contain important
start-up. all of the voltages are transmitted in full, information for the application. A
however; only the mean values are property byte is also available for each
Each SENTRON circuit-breaker can be transmitted, which, in most cases, is
configured individually with a different data point in the DPV1 data records. If
sufficient. the content of one or more data blocks
basic type.
Basic type 3 in the cyclic message is replaced, the
Selecting the basic type first defines the property byte is adapted automatically.
quantity of data and, therefore, the With basic type 3, the 14 data blocks are
length of the message. assigned measured values. This basic Property bytes can be used to determine
type has also been pre-assigned in such whether a value is available, for
The key circuit-breaker data can now be example. If the standard assignment of
transmitted without the need to make a way that it is only practical to use it
with the SENTRON WL with a basic type 2 and a SENTRON VL are
any further settings. The status of the used, the voltage values are marked as
circuit-breaker is the same for all three measurement function (if unmodified).
As described above, however, basic type "not available". This means, for
basic types. This information field is 2 example, that a standard interface can
bytes in size and will be explained in 3 can be selected and the pre-assigned
measured values that are not available be created in an operator control and
more detail later. In line with the status monitoring system that displays or
field, the basic types comprise between (e.g. phase-to-phase voltage) can be
replaced by maintenance or parameter hides the field depending on the bit.
4 and 14 data blocks, which are Measured values are always "read only",
pre-assigned. data as required. The pre-assigned data
can be replaced with all information while certain maintenance information
The format for all the pre-assigned that is no more than 2 bytes long. All the is "read only, but can be reset".
measured values is a one-word integer. other values are "cast", that is, truncated Depending on their source (e.g. ETU),
This must be interpreted in Motorola and adapted so that only the 2 least parameters are either "read and
format, which can be regarded as the significant bytes are transmitted. writable" or "read only".
"standard" on the PROFIBUS-DP. All this information can be determined
For a list of possible substitute values for
Basic type 1 the predefined data, see Chapter 7 from the property bytes.

In line with the 2-byte status "Data Library".

information, basic type 1 comprises four
data blocks. These are pre-assigned in Property Byte (PB)
such a way that they are designed for In each of the basic types, the assigned
use with a SENTRON VL and SENTRON
WL without a measurement function. Definition of the Property Byte
The most important phase currents are Value Data point is ...
transmitted here. This pre-assignment 0x 0 Read and writable
can be changed if necessary. It is not
0x 1 Read only, but can be reset (e.g. maintenance)
advisable to transmit the current in the Less significant nibble
0x 2 Read only, writable in factory only
neutral conductor with a 3-pole
SENTRON VL. A different value from the 0x 3 Read only
data library can be transmitted in its 0x0 Not available
place (e.g. the number of operating
0x4 Available, but option deactivated
cycles). Instead of the current in the More significant
0x5 Available, but option deactivated and outside the area
neutral conductor, this value is nibble
transmitted in the cyclic message in 0x6 Available and activated, but outside the area
place of the fourth data block. 0x7 Available, activated, within the area, and valid
The content can be reconfigured or the The property byte describes the properties of the accompanying data point
Table
default values changed using Switch ES 4-4
Power or the BDA.
Basic type 1 is particularly suitable for

4-10

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Byte Default assignment basic Byte Default assignment basic Byte Default assignment basic
type 1 type 2 type 3
0/1 Binary status information 0/1 Binary status information 0/1 Binary status information
2/3 Current in phase 1 2/3 Current in phase 1 2/3 Current in phase 1
4/5 Current in phase 2 4/5 Current in phase 2 4/5 Current in phase 2
6/7 Current in phase 3 6/7 Current in phase 3 6/7 Current in phase 3
Max. current in phase under Max. current in phase under Max. current in phase under
8/9 8/9 8/9
highest load highest load highest load
10 PB of current phase 1 10/11 Current in neutral conductor 10/11 Current in neutral conductor
11 PB of current phase 2 Phase-to-phase voltage mean 12/13 Phase-to-phase voltage L12
12/13
value
12 PB of current phase 3 14/15 Phase-to-phase voltage L23
Mean value of power factors
PB of max. current in phase 14/15 16/17 Phase-to-phase voltage L31
13 of 3 phases
under highest load
16/17 Total active energy of 3 phases Neutral-point displacement
The default selection of basic 18/19
Table voltage L1N
type 1 is specially designed for 18 PB of current phase 1
4-5
current transmission Neutral-point displacement
19 PB of current phase 2 20/21
voltage L2N
20 PB of current phase 3
Neutral-point displacement
PB of max. current in phase 22/23
21 voltage L3N
under highest load
Mean value of power factors
PB of current in neutral 24/25
22 of 3 phases
conductor
26/27 Total active energy of 3 phases
PB of phase-to-phase voltage
23 Total apparent power of 3
mean value 28/29
phases
PB of mean value of 3 power
24 30 PB of current phase 1
factors
25 PB of total active energy 31 PB of current phase 2

Basis type 2 with default 32 PB of current phase 3

Table
selections PB of max. current in phase
4-6 33
under highest load
PB of current in neutral
34
conductor
PB of phase-to-phase voltage
35
L12

PB of phase-to-phase voltage
36
L23

PB of phase-to-phase voltage
37
L31

PB of neutral-point
38
displacement voltage L1N

PB of neutral-point
39
displacement voltage L2N

PB of neutral-point
40
displacement voltage L3N

PB of mean value of 3 power

41
factors
42 PB of total active energy
43 PB of total apparent power
The default selection for basic
Table
type 3 contains 14 measured
4-7
values and their property

4-11

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Binary Status Information in the The binary status information
Cyclic Channel comprises two bytes (not one word,
The binary status information in the that is, the bytes do not have to be
cyclic channel is transmitted each time reversed so that they can be displayed in
data is exchanged. The status Motorola format). For more information
information is always identical and on data formats, see Chapter 7 "Data
always transmitted at the start of the Library".
data message, irrespective of the basic The information coding is identical in
type that has been selected. SENTRON WL and SENTRON VL,
provided the data is available.

Binary Status Information in the Cyclic Message

Byte Bit SENTRON WL SENTRON VL
Position of circuit-breaker Position of circuit-breaker
0 = Disconnected position 1 = Operating position
0/1 1 = Operating position always
2 = Check/test position transmitted
3 = Circuit-breaker not present
Status of circuit-breaker Status of circuit-breaker
0 = Not ready 0 = Not ready
Less significant byte 0 2/3 1 = OFF (main contacts disconnected) 1 = OFF (main contacts disconnected)
2 = ON (main contacts closed) 2 = ON (main contacts closed)
3 = Circuit-breaker has tripped 3 = Circuit-breaker has tripped
4 Availability message present Not available
5 Voltage applied to undervoltage release Not available
6 Storage spring is charged Not available
7 Overload warning present Overload warning present
0 An activated threshold value has been exceeded An activated threshold value has been exceeded
1 An alarm signal is currently present An alarm signal is currently present
PROFIBUS write protection block DPWriteEnable is PROFIBUS write protection block DPWriteEnable is
2
activated; write operations are prohibited activated; write operations are prohibited
3 Status of the free user input on the COM15 module Not available
Reason for last trip Reason for last trip
More significant byte 1 0 = No trip / last trip acknowledged 0 = No trip / last trip acknowledged
1 = Overload tripping (L) 1 = Overload tripping (L)
2 = Instantaneous short-circuit (I) 2 = Instantaneous short-circuit (I)
4/5/6
3 = Short-time-delay short-circuit (S) 3 = Short-time-delay short-circuit (S)
4 = Ground fault (G) 4 = Ground fault (G)
5 = Trip as a result of extended protection function 5 = Not available
6 = Overload in neutral conductor 6 = Overload in neutral conductor
7 Load shedding warning Load shedding warning
The binary status information is identical in all three basic types, and cannot be changed. It is transmitted with each message from
Table
the circuit-breaker. Two bytes provide information on the most important circuit-breaker-related status data.
4-8

4-12

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Control Bytes subsequently.  Reset the current trip
The three basic types differ with regard  Change the protection parameters
to the quantity and content of the data PROFIBUS Write Protection  Change the parameters for the
reported from the circuit-breaker to the (DPWriteEnable) extended protection function
class 1 master (e.g. PLC) with each All important write accesses can be (measurement function)
Data_Exchange. In accordance with the prevented from the PROFIBUS-DP. For  Change the communication
standard definitions, this data is this purpose, a hardware input is parameters
referred to input data from the point of available on both the COM10 and  Change the parameters for the
view of the PLC. COM15 modules. measured value setting
The output data of the class 1 master is If this input is not bridged (active (measurement function)
identical in all three basic types. The release), write access is not possible  Reset maintenance information
control bytes to the circuit-breaker are (there are, however, a number of (counters)
always two bytes long. These control exceptions here). For more information  Force the digital outputs (in the
bytes can be used to switch the on the precise assignment of the write Module Operation screen in Switch ES
circuit-breaker on and off, acknowledge protection inputs (DPWriteEnable), see Power)
trips, and reset memory contents. the SENTRON VL and SENTRON WL
 DPV1 start-up parameters from the
It is sufficient to set the bits for all the chapters.
Switch ES Power Object Manager (see
controllers to between 0.5 and 5 The following actions are blocked if the Chapter 5 "Switch ES Power")
seconds because setting the outputs is input of the write protection function
edge triggered. The control bits must has not been bridged:
then be reset to prevent any unwanted
 Switch on/off
actions from being triggered

Control bytes to the SENTRON circuit-breaker

Byte Bit SENTRON WL SENTRON VL
Switch circuit-breaker Switch circuit-breaker
0 = Not defined (no action) 0 = Not defined (no action)
0/1 1 = Switch off (open the main contacts) 1 = Switch off (open the main contacts)
2 = Switch on (close the main contacts) 2 = Switch on (close the main contacts)
3 = Not defined (no action) 3 = Not defined (no action)
2 A current trip is acknowledged and reset A current trip is acknowledged and reset
Least significant byte 0 3 Not used Not used
Activate the free user output on the COM15
4 Not used
module
5 Not used Not used
6 Not used Not used
7 Not used Not used
0/1 Not used Not used
2 Delete trip and event log Delete trip and event log
Reset all min./max. value memories (except Reset all min./max. value memories (except
3
temperature) temperature)
Most significant byte 1
4 Reset min./max. temperatures Not available
5 Not used Not used
Reset all resettable maintenance information and Reset all resettable maintenance information and
6
counters counters
Bit for synchronizing the system time to the current Bit for synchronizing the system time to the current
7
half hour half hour
All three basic types contain a 2-byte block featuring the most important binary information transmitted with the message for
Table
controlling the circuit-breaker.
4-9

4-13

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 The following control functions are SYNC and FREEZE The UNFREEZE control command
available even without a bridge: The PROFIBUS-DP features the control cancels the FREEZE mode of the
 Change and set the trigger functions commands SYNC (synchronize outputs) addressed DP slaves so that these
for the waveform memory and FREEZE (freeze inputs) to enable resume cyclic data transmission with
 Read the content of the waveform data exchange to be coordinated. the DP master. The input data is
memory immediately updated by the DP slave
A DP master with the appropriate and can then be read by the DP master.
 Change the threshold value functionality can send the SYNC and/or
parameters FREEZE control commands (broadcast Note that once a DP slave has been
 Set/change the system time messages) to a group of DP slaves restarted or is started for the first time,
simultaneously. For this purpose, the DP it does not switch to SYNC or FREEZE
 Change the free texts (comments,
slaves are arranged in SYNC and FREEZE mode until it has received the first SYNC
system IDs)
groups. A maximum of 8 groups can be or FREEZE commands from the DP
 Reset the min./max. values master.
created for a master system. Each DP
 Change the free user output on the
slave, however, cannot be assigned to The SENTRON circuit-breakers VL and
COM15 module
more than one group. WL support both SYNC and FREEZE
Write protection ensures that all the mode.
SFC11 DPSYNC_FR is used to trigger the
required information is available at the
control commands from the S7 user
automation level, but prevents any Time Synchronization
program. Not every master supports
changes to the status of the
this function. Each SENTRON circuit-breaker is
circuit-breaker. Changes can only be
The SYNC control command enables equipped with an internal clock
made by the operator of the power
users to synchronize the outputs on integrated in the PROFIBUS-DP modules
distribution system.
several slaves simultaneously. When the COM10 and COM15. The system time
Why does the write protection function cannot be buffered during a power
control command SYNC is received, the
permit certain actions? failure.
addressed DP slaves switch the data
All actions that are not blocked are for from the last Data_Exchange message The time must be specified accurately to
remote diagnosis only and do not have from the DP master in their transfer keep track of sources of errors if several
any effect on the current status. Trips buffer to the outputs. This enables trips occur, for example (identify the
and curves can, however, be diagnosed output data to be activated source of error). The saved messages
more accurately, even using remote (synchronized) simultaneously on and the minimum/maximum values are
methods. several DP slaves. also assigned a time stamp and saved.
The UNSYNC control command cancels Without a system time in the terminal,
the SYNC mode of the addressed DP events could only be assigned time
slaves. The DP slave then resumes cyclic stamps in a connected PLC and with
data transmission, that is, the data sent limited accuracy.
from the DP master is immediately To ensure that an accurate time stamp is
switched to the outputs. provided in conjunction with all the
The FREEZE control command enables other circuit-breakers, the clock in every
the user to "freeze" the input data of DP device must be synchronized regularly
slaves. If a FREEZE command is sent to a with the other circuit-breakers to the
group of DP slaves, all of these slaves correct time. This is carried out as
simultaneously freeze the signals follows:
currently present at their inputs. These First import the current time from the
can then be read by the DP master. The PLC to each circuit-breaker. To do so,
input data in the DP slaves is not send data record 68 with the current
updated until a new FREEZE command system time to all the circuit-breakers
has been received. via the acyclic DPV1 channel services
(see Chapter 7 for the exact
assignment). The time does not have to
be completely accurate at this stage as
this is looked after during
synchronization.
Shortly before the half hour has elapsed
(29:50), a SYNC command is sent to all

4-14

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 the devices in question. The bit for Diagnostic Message Diagnosing the SENTRON WL
synchronizing the clocks (bit 7 of byte 1 By requesting the diagnostic data, the In accordance with the relevant
of the control byte) is then set (29:55). DP master checks at start-up whether standards, the slave reports an external
With millisecond accuracy, a SYNC the DP slave exists and is ready to be diagnostic message to the PLC master
command is sent again on the half hour parameterized. The diagnostic data when it sets byte 0 to "08" instead of
(30:00). In this way, the clocks for all the from the DP slave comprises a "00". This is generated automatically by
devices within the SYNC group are diagnostic data part defined in the ASIC.
rounded up or down to the half hour. EN50170 and specific DP slave If an external diagnostic message is
Synchronization is not carried out on diagnostic information. The DP slave present, byte 7 is set to "01" instead of
the hour because clocks that are fast uses the diagnostic data to report its "00" to indicate that an external
would then be one hour ahead of clocks operating status (PROFIBUS-DP) to the diagnosis is present.
that are slow. DP master and, in the event of a The external diagnosis in the SENTRON
An UNSYNC command must then be diagnosis, the reason for the diagnostic WL is only triggered in one of the
sent and the synchronization bit (bit 7 message. A DP slave can report a local following statuses:
of byte 1 of the control byte) reset so diagnostic event to the DP master via
 The COM15 module is not ready for
that data exchange can continue. the layer-2 message priority "high prio"
operation
of the Data_Exchange response
This procedure should be carried out message in layer 2. The DP master then  Bit 18.2 and/or 18.3 report a number
regularly on a time-controlled basis, for requests the diagnostic data from the that is not 0 (a maintenance
example, by GPS in an S7. DP slave for analysis. If no current message).
diagnostic events are present, the  Bit 18.4 is set, that is, the
Data_Exchange response message is circuit-breaker is not present
"low prio". The diagnostic data of a DP  One of the bits in byte 19 = "1"
slave can be requested at any time by a In bytes 24 to 27, the presence of a
DP master without necessarily reporting module is entered on the c.
diagnostic events. If a module is added, removed, or
Diagnostic message for S7 stations identified as faulty, the corresponding
bit in byte 19 (19.2, 19.3, 19.4) is set
Diagnostics-capable modules in and the affected module indicated in
distributed peripheral devices can bytes 20 to 23. An incoming (i.e.
report events, such as a partial station 08 0C 00 xx 80 C0 42 01 05 82 00 00 00
failure, wire breakage in signal 0F 81 01 00 ....) diagnostic message is
modules, periphery channel then triggered on the PROFIBUS-DP. If
short-circuit/overload, or a load voltage the module that triggered the diagnosis
supply failure, using a diagnostic alarm. does not change in any other way, the
With an incoming and outgoing message becomes an outgoing
diagnostic alarm, the organizational message after 10 seconds (provided
block for diagnostic alarm OB82 is called that no other reasons for a diagnosis
by the CPU operating system. If a exist:
diagnostic alarm occurs and OB82 is not 00 0C 00 xx 80 C0 42 00 05 82 00 00 00
programmed, the CPU switches to the 0F 81 01 00 ....). The information on the
STOP status. last change (19.2, 19.3, or 19.4 plus
A failure (incoming event) or restoration module number bytes 20 to 24) remains
(outgoing event) of a DP slave is until another message is received.
reported by the operating system of the If a module is added, the corresponding
S7 CPU via OB86. If OB86 has not been module is indicated in bytes 20 to 24. In
programmed, the S7 CPU switches to the list of modules present, the module
the STOP status if an event occurs. that has been added will not appear
until after the outgoing diagnostic
message has been processed (10
seconds). The user can always see
which module was last added to the
c.
The same applies to removing modules,

4-15

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Structure of the PROFIBUS Diagnosis Function
Part of the diagnosis Byte.Bit Meaning for SENTRON WL Meaning for SENTRON VL
0 Station status 1 Station status 1
1 Station status 2 Station status 2
2 Station status 3 Station status 3
DP standard
3 PROFIBUS master address PROFIBUS master address
4 ID no. of high byte (0x80) ID no. of high byte (0x80)
5 ID no. of low byte (0xC0) ID no. of low byte (0xC0)
6 0x42 fixed 0x42 fixed
0x00 when no device-specific diagnosis is present 0x00 when no device-specific diagnosis is present
7
0x01 when a device-specific diagnosis is present 0x01 when a device-specific diagnosis is present
8 0x05 fixed 0x05 fixed
ID-related
diagnosis 9 0x82 fixed 0x82 fixed
10 0x00 fixed 0x00 fixed
11 0x00 fixed 0x00 fixed
12 0x00 fixed 0x00 fixed
13 0x0F fixed 0x0F fixed
14 0x81 fixed 0x81 fixed
Additional header
15 0x01 fixed 0x01 fixed
16 0x00 fixed 0x00 fixed
17 0x00 not used 0x00 not used
18.0 The COM15 module is not ready for operation The COM10 module is not ready for operation
18.1 Not used Not used
State of the main contacts Not used
0 = OK
18.2 /
1 = Perform visual inspection on main contacts
18.3
2 = Immediate inspection of main contacts
3 = Not used
18.4 Circuit-breaker is not present Not used
18.5 - Not used
Not used
18.7
Device-specific SENTRON VL communication with the COM10
diagnosis 19.0 c not connected
module interrupted
19.1 Not used Not used
19.2 Last action on the c: Module removed Not used
19.3 Last action on the c: Module added Not used
19.4 Last action on the c: Fault detected Not used
19.5 - Not used
Not used
19.7
20.0 - c module, which is removed, added, Not used
23.7 or reports fault (19.2 to 19.4)
24.0 - Not used
Module presence list on the c
27.7
The structure of the diagnosis function for the SENTRON VL and WL circuit-breakers is identical, although the SENTRON VL does not
Table
support all of the functions (see c Module Presence)
4-10

4-16

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Explanation of bytes 20 to 27 in the SENTRON WL diagnostic message
Byte /
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit
20/24 Not assigned Not assigned Not assigned Not assigned Not assigned Not assigned Not assigned Not assigned
Metering Analog Analog ETU76B Not assigned BDA/BDA Plus Not assigned
function or output output graphic
21/25 Not assigned
metering module module display
function Plus Module no. 1 Module no. 2
Digital input Digital input Digital output
Digital output
module module module Configurable
module rotary Breaker
22/26 Not assigned position position rotary coding Not assigned output
coding switch status sensor
PROFIBUS parameter set switch module
Module no. 1
inputs switchover Module no. 2
23/27 Not assigned Not assigned Not assigned Not assigned Not assigned ZSI module ETU COM15
This table explains bytes 20 to 23 and 24 to 27 of the device-specific diagnosis of the SENTRON WL.
Table
Bytes 20 to 23 indicate the module that is referenced for diagnostic message 19.2 to 19.4.
4-11
The bytes indicate all the modules connected to the c.

except here, modules that are to be

removed are not removed until the
outgoing diagnostic message has been
deleted from the list of modules
present.
If a fault is reported on a module, the
c module remains in the list
of modules present.

Diagnosing the SENTRON VL

The SENTRON VL does not have as many
diagnostic messages as the SENTRON
WL. Like the SENTRON WL, however, it
does have incoming and outgoing
diagnostic messages.
If a diagnostic message is not present:
00 0C 00 xx 80 C0 42 00 05 82 00 00 00
0F 81 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00
The COM10 module is out of operation:
08 0C 00 xx 80 C0 42 01 05 82 00 00 00
0F 81 01 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00
Online diagnosis in the STEP7 HWConfig tool displays the diagnostic information
Fig.
The communication connection in text form. The modules recognized on the c and the last action on
4-10
between the COM10 module and the c are indicated. Maintenance information is also available.
SENTRON VL is interrupted: Diagnostic Alarm for S7 and The diagnostic information can,
08 0C 00 xx 80 C0 42 01 05 82 00 00 00 Operating Mode S7V1 however, be read at any time by the
0F 81 01 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 If the SENTRON circuit-breakers are slave via SFC13.
00 00 configured using the Object Manager,
they are activated in operating mode
S7V1. In this case, a diagnostic message
does not automatically result in OB82
being executed. Diagnostic alarms are
not supported.

4-17

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 output address exists, the IDs 'B#16#54'
for the input and 'B#16#55' for the
output are specified for the 'IOID'
parameter. If the input and output
addresses are identical, the ID 'B#16#54'
for inputs is also parameterized.
For more information on the system
functions, refer to the reference manual
'System Software for S7-300/400
System and Standard Functions'.

Cyclic (recurring) use of acyclic services

If data is to be read via the C1 channel
(DPV1 class 1 master) or C2 channel
(DPV1 class 2 master, e.g. Switch ES
Power) in a recurring time frame, the
minimum interval between two read
requests for each channel must be
200ms.
Write requests via the C1 or C2 channel
should generally be sent on an
event-controlled basis rather than in a
recurring time frame.
If these intervals are undershot,
The SENTRON WL diagnostic information is currently in the S7 diagnosis buffer. An
Fig. resource problems can occur in the
incoming diagnostic message is not present.
4-11 communication interfaces, which
could, in turn, result in communication
Data Exchange via DPV1 With the class 2 master, a
on the C1 and/or C2 channels being
PROFIBUS-DPV1 (DPV1) is an communication link can even be
interrupted.
enhancement of the PROFIBUS-DP established to slaves that have not been
protocol. PROFIBUS-DP and DPV1 configured or parameterized by this
devices can be connected to one line. master and are still connected to a class
Being downwards compatible, the 1 master. A class 2 master is particularly
PROFIBUS-DP and DPV1 protocol can suitable for commissioning, diagnosis,
run on the same line. With DPV1, and visualization tasks with the
additional data records with up to 240 programs Switch ES Power or WinCC, for
bytes of user data can be transmitted example.
acyclically by means of user programs, Special system functions that enable
such as STEP7, Switch ES Power, or data records to be sent and received are
WinCC. available in SIMATIC S7 for enhanced
In this way, the DPV1 protocol can be data transmission via DPV1. The
used to transmit parameter, diagnostic, following example illustrates how a
control, and test data quickly and easily. data record is read and written from
SENTRON WL/VL. System functions
One prerequisite here is that a SFC58 (write) and SFC59 (read) are
DPV1-capable class 1 master or class 2 used.
master is available. These can be used to
transmit the above data via an Note: The value specified for parameter
additional channel. "IOID" depends on the logical base
address "LADDR". The smaller input or
output address, which is displayed or
was entered under DP Slave Properties
on the "Address / ID" tab page, is always
used as the logical base address.
Depending on whether an input or

4-18

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Example: Reading and Writing Data
Records with an S7
This example is based on an S7-300 CPU
with an integrated DP interface and
STEP7 Version 5.1.

Writing data records

In this example, SFC58 is used to write
the protection parameters to DS129.
The data is stored in DB 129 and
contains the current parameters, which
are to be sent to the circuit-breaker. In
this example, the logical base address is Fig.
The STEP7 program code shows how the entire DR129 is written from DB129 to the
the same for the inputs and outputs, device. The write process is triggered once by marker M20.0.
4-12
that is, ID 'W#16#54' is specified. The
request is triggered with an edge on
marker M20.0 and reset with an edge
on M20.1 once it has been processed
successfully, enabling the user to
control how the data record is written.
The time required to process the request
depends on the system configuration
and may take several CPU cycles.
If a fault occurs, MW22 is available for
information purposes. For more
information, refer to the reference
manual "System Manual for
S7 300/400 System and Standard
This program example shows how DR94 is read and stored in DB94 in STEP7. The
Functions". Fig.
process is triggered by setting marker M20.4. Cyclic updates are not carried out.
4-13
Reading data records
In this example, DR94 (operating data)
is read using SFC59. The data is stored
in DB 94 and contains the current
circuit-breaker operating data.
Since the operating principle and
parameters are identical to system
function SFC58, it will not be discussed
in any further detail here.

4-19

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 It has recently been decided to issue separate certificates for SENTRON WL and SENTRON VL. It used to be the case that two
Fig.
products tested in two different test centers (Fürth, Germany, and Johnson City, USA) were issued a joint PROFIBUS certificate.
4-14

4-20

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com
 Breaker Data Adapter (BDA)
Breaker Data Adapter Plus (BDA
Plus)
Short description of the BDA/BDA Plus

System Requirements

Connect the BDA/BDA Plus to the SENTRON circuit breakers

Communication via the serial interface

Communication via the Ethernet interface

Operating Instructions

Troubleshooting

6
PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com
 The Breaker Data Adapter (BDA) and BDA Plus
Brief Description and System Requirements

The breaker data adapter (BDA) is the first circuit-breaker directly from the BDA. The appropriate
help pages are also stored directly in
parameterization device to feature an integrated web server to the BDA, which means they are always
parameterize, operate, monitor, and diagnose the SENTRON WL and available when they are needed.
 The comprehensive use of Java
SENTRON VL circuit-breakers. The BDA Plus also features an Ethernet technology ensures the systems can
operate regardless of the operating
interface for connection to the Ethernet, intranet, or Internet.
system. This means that the BDA can
be used with all Windows versions,
Description The breaker data adapter Plus features Linux, and all other operating systems
an additional Ethernet interface, which provided by the corresponding Java
The BDA can be used to read and
means that the BDA Plus can also be Virtual Machine.
change the parameters of the SENTRON
WL and SENTRON VL circuit-breakers, addressed via the intranet or Internet.  Smaller hand-held devices with
display measured values, as well as The communication options available PocketPC as the operating system can
visualize, analyze, and store diagnostic via the intranet or Internet are restricted also be used as can PCs or notebooks,
data. only by the network administration. provided they fulfill the system
All write actions (changing parameters requirements.
It comprises a microcomputer on which
or switching actions) are password  The way the data is structured and
an embedded Linux operating system
protected. formatted for display in the BDA and
featuring a web server application runs.
Switch ES Power is largely identical, so
The HTML pages and the Java program When connected temporarily, the BDA
the pages have the same look and
codes are stored in the internal flash can be used to read and change
feel.
and can be displayed on a browser. The parameters, perform diagnoses, or
browser itself displays the HTML pages, display measured values. For this  The memory formats for storing and
while the more complex functions are reason, a magnet is supplied with the documenting the circuit-breaker
implemented using Java applets. A Java BDA so that it can be attached to doors parameters that have been set are
Virtual Machine (VM) is required to run and other elements containing iron. identical to those in Switch ES Power.
the Java applets. This is available free of The DIN rail installation kit supplied can Files generated in Switch ES Power
charge for a wide range of browsers and be used to connect the BDA can also be transmitted to the
operating systems. permanently. Depending on the circuit-breaker and vice versa using
application, the BDA Plus is normally the BDA. This saves time and effort in
All the pages that can be displayed are documenting data and makes it easier
stored on the BDA in German and used for a permanent connection. In
this way, it can be accessed via the to replace circuit-breakers, for
English; the language is selected when example.
the data is called up in the browser for Ethernet, intranet, or Internet.
the first time. A new language can be If the SENTRON WL is to be switched on
selected during operation when or off via the BDA, the PROFIBUS-DP
"SENTRON WL/VL" at the top of the COM15 module must also be installed.
hierarchy is selected. This contains the connections for
The cable supplied is used to connect activating the opening and closing
the BDA to the SENTRON circuit-breaker. solenoids and the motorized drive.
With the SENTRON WL, the BDA can The PROFIBUS-DP communication
either be connected directly to the trip function does not have to be started
unit or to the last c module. here.
With the SENTRON VL, it is connected Benefits of the BDA:
directly to the trip unit. The indicator
 No special software has to be
with the browser application (e.g.
installed; the display software is
notebook) is connected to the BDA
supplied with the circuit-breaker data
using a null modem cable.

6-1

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 BDA in Offline Mode (or BDA Plus)
In offline mode, the BDA or BDA Plus is
only connected to a notebook
(represents all input/output devices). All
the required parameters can be set in
this operating mode and saved for later
use (download to the circuit-breakers).
The memory format is identical to that
of the PROFIBUS-DP software Switch ES
Power. No power is supplied via the
notebook COM interface, which means
that an additional power supply unit (24
V DC) must be connected to the BDA.

In offline mode, the BDA must be supplied externally with 24 V DC. Parameters
Graphic
can be set, stored, and printed out.
BDA as a Hand-Held Controller (or 6-1
BDA Plus)
As a hand-held controller, the BDA is
operated by connecting it temporarily to
the appropriate SENTRON VL/WL trip
unit interface.
All SENTRON circuit-breakers in a
system can be parameterized one after
the other using just one BDA, and the
parameter data saved to a notebook for
further processing. In addition, all the
diagnostic data of the circuit-breaker
can be read via the BDA. The parameter
data can also be exchanged with the
PROFIBUS-DP parameterization
software Switch ES Power.
An additional 24 V DC power supply is
required if the circuit-breaker is not yet
supplied with power (e.g. by means of a
current on the main circuit; with
SENTRON WL by an external 24 V DC on
the c; with SENTRON VL, an additional
24 V DC power supply usually has to be
In temporary mode, the BDA is normally attached using magnets.
connected). Graphic
6-2

6-2

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 BDA with Remote Access via the
Modem (or BDA Plus)
If the SENTRON VL/WL circuit-breaker
data is to be accessed over a long
distance, a remote access method with
modems can be used. The BDA is
connected to the circuit-breaker either
temporarily or permanently. The
connection from the BDA to the
notebook (or PC), however, is "split up"
and "extended" via a modem route. This
enables all the circuit-breaker data to be
accessed irrespective of the user's
geographical location. This is
particularly useful for carrying out
targeted diagnosis and maintenance
management (e.g. analyzing current or
voltage waveshapes before a trip) or
remote parameterization.

You can use modems to extend the serial connection from the notebook to the
Graphic
BDA to enable the circuit-breaker data to be accessed irrespective of your
6-3
geographical location.
BDA Plus as an Ethernet Interface
In addition to the above-mentioned
functions, the BDA Plus enables data to
be accessed via the Ethernet. In this
case, the circuit-breaker data is not
transmitted as net data, but displayed
on HTML pages in an
application-specific format. The
BDA/BDA Plus cannot be used to
integrate the circuit-breakers in higher
level visualization systems, such as
WinCC. If it is to be possible to display
several SENTRON VL/WL circuit-breakers
round-the-clock online using the
communication system in a switchgear
unit without the PROFIBUS-DP, one BDA
Plus is required for each circuit-breaker.
In this case, the circuit-breaker is
selected by entering the BDA-specific IP
address in the browser. Password
protection in the BDA and BDA Plus
prevents unauthorized access.
Depending on the network settings (routing tables and firewall entries), the
Graphic
By making the appropriate settings on circuit-breaker can be diagnosed by all PCs with an Internet connection.
6-4
the firewall, the SENTRON VL/WL
circuit-breakers can also be accessed via
the intranet and Internet.

6-3

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 System Requirements VM2 is available on the browser. If not, Connectable circuit-breakers
Certain prerequisites have to be fulfilled the system automatically displays a The BDA can be connected to all
before the BDA or BDA Plus can be window informing the user of this and SENTRON WL circuit-breakers with
operated. One of the two standard automatically links the user to the c. These are all the
browsers (Internet Explorer as of V5.5 or appropriate Sun Microsystems page. An circuit-breakers with the following trip
Netscape Navigator as of V6.2) must be Internet connection must be units: ETU45B, ETU55B, and ETU76B. It
installed on the output device (e.g. established to ensure the automatic can be connected either directly to the
notebook). Compatibility with other installation procedure functions trip unit or to the last external
browsers cannot currently be properly. If this is not the case, the c module. Circuit-breakers
guaranteed. Virtual Machine required for the can also communicate with the BDA if
Microsoft Windows operating systems they have been retrofitted with the
To ensure independence between the can be downloaded from the following
operating systems and browsers, all the communication function.
address:
pages have been written in HTML code With SENTRON VL circuit-breakers, the
http://java.sun.com/products/archive/j2
and Java applets. A Java Virtual Machine BDA can only communicate with trip
se/1.4.0_01/index.html
is required to display the pages. units with the ETU LCD (ETU40M,
Once installed, the option Java 2VM ETU40, or ETU42). The connection is
What is Java? V1.4.0_01 must be activated in the established via the front interface.
Java is a platform-neutral browser (if it is not already).
object-oriented programming language To avoid conflicts with other Java Getting started with the BDA Plus
originally developed by Sun versions, you are recommended to If the BDA Plus is installed the first time,
Microsystems. Java is implemented in de-install older Java versions and delete the settings for the IP address and the
all IT areas of the commercial, industrial, the cache in the browser. standard gateway as well as the subnet
and administrative sectors, and is mask must be set using the serial
The target system with the browser also
available free of charge for many communication via RS232. After this
requires one or both of the following
operating systems and platforms - from the BDA Plus must boot again to load
communication interfaces:
cell phones to real-time mainframe the ethernet driver with the specified
 A serial interface with RS232 design,
systems. parameters.
such as that usually integrated on
Unlike most compiler languages, Java standard PCs (e.g. COM1) for
applets are not directly translated into a point-to-point (PPP) communication
set of commands that can be with the BDA.
understood by a "real processor".
 A LAN interface for communicating
Instead, they are first converted to the
with the BDA Plus via the Ethernet
"Java byte code". Although this byte
code is highly machine-oriented, a "Java
Virtual Machine" (VM), which emulates
a standardized processor for all Java
applets, is required on the target
computer.
Since Java normally compiles data twice
(once with the developer and once with
the user), this principle is known as the
Just-In-Time (JIT) compiler. Despite the
advantages already mentioned,
however, Java applets take longer to
start, since the machine code is
generated during initialization.
The same Java applet, however, can run
on all supported systems without
modifications.
The Java Virtual Machine V2 V1.4.0_01
is required to display the BDA pages.
When these pages are called up for the
first time, the BDA checks whether Java

6-4

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 The Breaker Data Adapter (BDA) and BDA Plus
Connection to SENTRON Circuit-Breakers

To operate the BDA, it must be connected to the target system (e.g. a PC) cabinets using magnets fitted on the
back.
on one side and a SENTRON circuit-breaker on the other. Different
Permanent
scenarios are possible here depending on the application.
The trip unit interface through the front
connection is not suitable if a BDA or
SENTRON WL required is supplied with the BDA. An BDA Plus is to be permanently
additional 24 V DC power supply unit is connected to a SENTRON WL
With SENTRON WL, two basic methods also required if the circuit-breaker is not circuit-breaker. The connection on the
are available for connecting the BDA. yet supplied with power via the last c module, such as the
c. For this purpose, a voltage COM15 module, or one of the other
Temporary connection is located on the top of the modules, is much more suitable. In this
If the BDA is to be used as a local BDA next to the interface to the case, a cable is supplied with the BDA
parameterization tool and several SENTRON circuit-breaker. that can be connected directly to the
circuit-breakers are to be set in In temporary mode (as a replacement RJ45 plug-in contact of the c
succession, the local front interface of for the hand-held controller), the BDA module. In most cases, a BDA Plus is
the trip unit can be used. The cable can be quickly secured to all switchgear used for permanent installation. The
DIN rail installation kit supplied ensures
that the device is permanently secured.
24 V DC power supply Connection to the circuit-breaker The principle regarding the power
supply is the same as for temporary
operation: if the c is supplied
with power, the BDA will also operate
without an extra power supply unit.
Otherwise, the BDA must also be
connected to a 24 V DC power supply
unit.

SENTRON VL
If the BDA is connected to the front
interface of the ETU LCD, it must always
Top
be operated with a 24 V DC power
supply, since it is not supplied by the
Bottom
circuit-breaker.

RS232 plug for PPP connection Ethernet interface Reset button

The physical BDA interfaces. The connection to the circuit-breaker and optional
Fig.
power supply are on the top, while the RS232 interface (or the Ethernet interface
6-1
in the case of BDA Plus) and the reset button are on the bottom.

6-5

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Operation
As a microcomputer, the BDA is booted ETU45B trip unit
in the same way as a PC. This takes
approximately 40 seconds and is started
automatically when the power supply is
switched on. During this time, the
content is loaded from the Flash
memory to the main memory, an
internal self test is carried out, the
operating system (embedded Linux) is
booted, and the web server application Breaker data adapter
started.
The reset button on the underside
enables the BDA to be restarted
manually at any time.
The LEDs indicate the operating status
during the boot-up process. The upper
Local interface of
DEVICE LED is first red/green, while the
trip unit
lower c LED is red only. After
about 10 seconds, this also changes to
red/green. During the load process, the PPP connection to PC
Ethernet connection is checked for a
connected network. Only then is the
appropriate driver loaded. Since the
For operation over a short period of time, the BDA can be connected to the local
BDA Plus is to be operated with an Fig.
interface of the trip unit. In this configuration, only the RS232 connection to the
Ethernet connection, a physical 6-2
PC is generally used.
connection to the Ethernet must already
exist during the boot-up process.

BDA Plus
Meaning of the LEDs on the BDA
LED Display Meaning
red BDA out of order
green BDA in operation External c
DEVICE
red/ BDA booting up module
green
BDA in online
mode and
red connection to
DIN rail
circuit-breaker
interrupted
Connection exists
green to c or
c SENTRON VL
red/ BDA booting up
green
Connection to Ethernet
BDA in offline
mode, even if
off
circuit-breaker is
connected.
The LEDs on the BDA indicate In a permanent installation, the BDA should be connected to the last external
Table Fig.
the current operating status. c module. It can be secured using either a magnet or a DIN rail, as
6-1 6-3
shown above.

6-6

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 When the boot-up process is complete,
the DEVICE LED switches to green, while
the c LED switches to green
or is extinguished, depending on the BDA - SENTRON VL
connection. connecting cable

If the BDA is not supplied via the

c of the SENTRON WL, it
must be activated via an external 24 V 24 V DC power
supply
DC power supply. The power supply unit
used to run serial communication of the
3WN6 with Win3WN6, if the 3WN6 is
not supplied externally, can be used for
this purpose. The order number is:
3WX3647-6JA02.
Other 24 V DC power supply units that
supply the required power can also be ETU LCD
used.

PPP connection to PC

Connection to COM10

Connection to Ethernet

If the BDA is operated with the SENTRON VL, a 24 V DC power supply is essential.
Fig.
With the BDA Plus, the Ethernet interface can also be used.
6-4

Technical data for the BDA and BDA Plus

Max./min. operating voltage (V) 19.2/28.8
Current input from the c or power supply unit
100mA/300mA
min./typ./max. (mA)
Power loss min./typ./max. (W) 3/5/7
Dimensions W/H/D (mm) 82/153/38
Weight (kg) 0.38
Temperature range (°C) 0 to 55°C
This table provides accurate technical data for the BDA and BDA Plus
Table
2-2

6-7

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 The Breaker Data Adapter (BDA) and BDA Plus
Connection to the BDA via the Serial Communication
System
To operate the BDA, it must be connected to the target system (e.g. a PC) A test ping can also be used to check
that the connection has been
on one side and a SENTRON circuit-breaker on the other. A range of options established correctly. Once you have
is available, depending on the application and operating system. opened the entry screen (Start >
Execute) and entered "ping 2.2.2.1", a
To ensure that serial communication is WindowsME. WindowsXP screens are DOS box appears that displays either
possible between the target system and virtually the same as those in "Reply from 2.2.2.1 after..."
the BDA, you have to carry out the Windows2000. (connection OK) or "Reply timed out"
following steps: (connection not available).
 Installing a data communications
 Connect the BDA to the circuit-breaker connection.  Start the browser (Internet Explorer or
and supply with power. Once a standard modem has been Netscape Navigator)

 Connect the BDA to the COM interface installed, a communications link must  Entering the target IP address 2.2.2.1.
of the target system (e.g. PC) using a be established once via this modem. You have to enter 2.2.2.1 in the
fully assigned null modem cable. To do so, a data communications address line. The usual "http://" does
Caution: With a null modem cable, connection must be set up via not have to be entered. When you
pins 2 and 3, 4 and 6, and 7 and 8 "Workstation > Data Communications press ENTER, the pages will be loaded
must be assigned and reversed with Network". Once the appropriate from the BDA.
respect to each other. modem has been selected, the Note: You may have to include the
maximum rate has to be selected address 2.2.2.1 in the list of addresses
The COM port used must not be being again. The name of the connection is that do not use a proxy server. The use
used by a different application (e.g. user defined, while the user name of a proxy server is optional and
synchronization program). must be "ppp" and the address signal depends on the network.

 Installing a standard modem. "555". A preselection code and A desktop link can be created if the BDA
Once the physical connection has password must not be entered. connection is used frequently. To create
been established using a null modem All of these settings are shown on the an Internet Explorer link with the local IP
cable, a standard modem must be following pages. Windows98 address of the BDA on the desktop, you
installed once on each PC. The screenshots are used to represent the have to drag the Internet Explorer icon
procedure for installing the modem operating systems Windows95, in the address line to the left of the
varies slightly depending on the Windows98; WindowsNT, and address to the desktop. Alternatively,
operating system. The screenshots on WindowsME. Only the screenshots the BDA start icon can be used. To do so,
the following pages provide a from WindowsXP are used for press the left mouse button to save it on
step-by-step guide to the procedure. Windows2000 and WindowsXP. the hard disk as a bitmap and specify it
The standard modem to be selected -  Establishing the connection. as an icon in the properties window of
28800 bps - is not related to the actual A communications link is established the link saved on the desktop.
transmission rate. The examples by activating the installed data
illustrate the connection to the COM1 communications connection. Once
interface; other interfaces must be set the user name and password have
accordingly. The installation process been checked (a password must not
always begins in the Control Panel of be entered), the window for
the operating system. The default establishing the connection
settings in the "Properties" windows of disappears from the Windows systray.
the modem do not usually have to be The systray is the area on the bottom
changed. They are only shown as a right next to the system clock in the
reference if any problems arise. toolbar. A small icon with two
The screenshots on the following computers appears here.
pages for Windows98 are identical for Double-clicking this opens a window
Windows95, WindowsNT, and displaying the properties of this
connection.

6-8

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 #

Installing a standard modem with Windows98, part 1 (identical to Windows95, WindowsNT, and WindowsME):
Fig.
A standard modem (28800 bps) is selected and installed in the Control Panel. The automatic identification function must be
6-5
switched off for this purpose.

6-9

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 #

Installing a standard modem with Windows98, part 2 (identical to Windows95, WindowsNT, and WindowsME):
Fig.
Once you have installed the standard modem, you have to set it to the maximum rate of 115200; the default settings in the other
6-6
windows are retained.

6-10

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 #

Installing a data communications connection to the BDA with Windows98, part 1 (identical to Windows95 and
Fig.
WindowsME): You now have to establish a data communications connection to the BDA. To do so, double-click "Establish
6-7
new connection" in the Control Panel and then maintain the windows as shown.

6-11

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 #

Installing a data comm. connection to the BDA with Windows98, part 2 (identical to Windows95 and WindowsME):
Fig.
Once communication has been established, the connection window disappears from the Windows systray. To display the BDA
6-8
pages, enter address 2.2.2.1 in the browser. To call up the connection window, double-click the relevant icon in the systray.

Installing a standard modem with Windows2000, part 1 (identical to WindowsXP):

Fig.
To install a standard modem in WindowsXP, double-click the "Telephone and modem options" icon in the Control Panel.
6-9

6-12

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 #

Installing a standard modem with Windows2000, part 2 (identical to WindowsXP):

Fig.
Select the standard modem (28800) and assign it to a free COM interface.
6-10

6-13

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 #

Installing a standard modem with Windows2000, part 3 (identical to WindowsXP):

Fig.
After installation, you have to set the maximum rate to 115200. This completes the installation procedure.
6-11

6-14

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 #

Setting up a data communications connection to the BDA with WindowsXP, part 1:

Fig.
Go from the Control Panel to "Network environments" and click "Establish new connection", as shown above. Then follow the
6-12
instructions provided by the Installation Wizard.

6-15

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 #

Setting up a data communications connection to the BDA with WindowsXP, part 2:

Fig.
Continue following the instructions and maintain the windows as shown above.
6-13

6-16

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 #

Setting up a data communications connection to the BDA with WindowsXP, part 3:

Fig.
Once the data communications connection has been successfully set up, WindowsXP establishes a connection with the BDA when
6-14
you click "Dial".

6-17

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 #

Setting up a data communications connection to the BDA with WindowsXP, part 4:

Fig.
Once the connection has been established, start the browser and enter the address 2.2.2.1. To display the connection properties
6-15
so that you can check them, double-click the appropriate icon in the systray.

6-18

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 #

Setting up a data communications connection to the BDA with Windows2000, part 1 (similar to WindowsNT):
Fig.
A modem is installed for Windows2000 in the same way as for WindowsXP. You then have to set up the data communications
6-16
connection to the BDA. To do so, proceed as shown in the screenshots.

6-19

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 #

Setting up a data communications connection to the BDA with Windows2000, part 2 (similar to WindowsNT):
Fig.
The procedure for setting up the data communications connection for WindowsNT is largely the same as the example shown
6-17
above for Windows2000.

6-20

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 #

Setting up a data communications connection to the BDA with Windows2000, part 3 (similar to WindowsNT):
Fig.
Once the installation is complete and the connection has been established via the null modem cable, start the browser by entering
6-18
the address 2.2.2.1. The PC temporarily adopts the address 2.2.2.2.

6-21

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 The Breaker Data Adapter (BDA) and BDA Plus
Connection to the BDA Plus via the Ethernet Interface

In addition to communication via the serial RS232 channel, the BDA Plus This is known as CSMA/CD and, as a
"random" access procedure, does not
features an Ethernet interface. If the BDA Plus is to be addressed via this guarantee a response within a certain
interface, it must be integrated in the local Ethernet (LAN). This chapter time frame. This largely depends on the
bus load, which means that real-time
explains a number of key terms and settings. applications cannot yet be implemented
with Ethernet.

Ethernet are being sent to them or any senders Definition of Key Terms
Unlike the PROFIBUS-DP, Ethernet does are currently active. If a sender has
started sending, it checks that the An intranet system comprises several
not function according to a master-slave Ethernet lines connected to each other
principle. All the stations have equal message it has sent is not corrupt. If the
message is not corrupt, the send via gateways within a company. The
priority on the bus, which means that structure of an intranet system can be
any station can be the sender and/or operation continues. If the sender
detects that its data is corrupt, it must just as heterogeneous as that of the
receiver. Internet: it can be restricted to one
A sender can only send on the bus if no abort the send operation because a
different sender has already started location or distributed worldwide.
other station is sending at that point.
This is made possible due to the fact sending data. Ethernet/intranet lines are connected to
that the stations are always "listening After a random time has elapsed, the each other using repeaters,
in" to find out whether any messages sender restarts the send operation. bridges/switches, routers, and
gateways. These modules work at
different levels in the ISO/OSI 7-layer
model.
The repeater (or star coupler) only
regenerates and strengthens the
electrical signal; it does not interpret
Internet bits. The bridge (or switch) physically
separates the networks and performs
fault and load disconnection. Filtering
and guidance mechanisms are usually
implemented. The router decouples the
networks at the logical level (protocol
Company proxy
Stations level) by means of the specified
Firewall Stations
addresses. Using routing tables i, it
knows which messages are to be sent to
which address. It continues to work,
Location proxy
however, on a protocol-dependent
Gateway
basis. The gateway also enables the
Intranet
router to convert services.
This means that it can act as a security
Repeater mechanism, such as a firewall, while
functioning as a proxy.
Location proxy Location proxy
A proxy is a program in a gateway that
Location proxy Stations acts as both the server and client. It
processes requests, translates them if
This diagram illustrates the structure of an Ethernet, how an intranet is necessary, and forwards them to the
Graphic
6-5
integrated, and how this is connected to the Internet. addressees. Proxies are also used to
control access (firewall) and forward

6-22

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 requests for protocols that are not each with up to 256 stations, class C on account of the configuration. The IP
supported. Intranet users in particular addresses are often used by smaller address of the gateway must be
are familiar with the Internet/intranet providers and companies with no more obtained from the network
page caching function offered by than 256 connections in their corporate administrator.
proxies. network. The IP addresses start from If 0.0.0.0 is set as the gateway IP
The intranet is connected to the Internet 192.x.x.x to 223.x.x.x address, no access to a gateway has
via a company proxy, which can also act been configured.
as a firewall. If a PC (user) wants to Subnet Mask
access an area of the intranet from the The subnet mask provides information Operation
Internet, the firewall must be informed on the size of the subnetwork (intranet) Once the addresses have been set, it
of which addresses can be accessed and its address band. In this way, each should be possible to call up the BDA
from outside. station knows whether the IP address to Plus via the Ethernet. This can be
be addressed is located in the same checked using a test ping. To do so,
IP Addresses subnetwork or whether it has to be enter "ping x.x.x.x" in Start > Execute
The partner must have a unique address addressed via a gateway. (x.x.x.x is the placeholder for the IP
so that it can be addressed in the Example: address of the BDA to be addressed).
extensive intranet/Internet system. The The DOS box that then appears tells you
IP address format is used for this IP address 1st BDA: 206.150.100.89 either that a reply from the "pinged" IP
purpose, which, as of Version 4, IP address 2nd BDA: 206.150.102.32 address is received, or that the request
comprises four figures from 0 to 255, IP address gateway: 206.150.100.1 has been timed out. In this case, no
separated by a decimal point. Example: IP address browser: 206.150.100.50 connection has yet been established
146.254.245.62 Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 from the BDA Plus to the target system.
The address is 32 bits long. Three Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 means
classes have been created to enable the that all addresses whose first three Note: You may have to include the IP
addresses to be structured on a bytes are the same as the station address of the BDA Plus in the list of
world-wide basis and to ensure that the address are located on the line of that addresses that do not use a proxy server.
same address does not exist twice. The station. These can be addressed directly The use of a proxy server is optional and
IP address comprises a small header, (in the example above, from the depends on the network.
which describes the class, a network browser of the first BDA). A comparison
of the address of the second BDA with Once a connection has been
number, and a host number. The established, start the browser and enter
address of a subnetwork (intranet, for the subnet mask shows that this address
is not on the same line as the station. the IP address of the BDA Plus in the
example) is encoded in the network address line.
number. The host number is basically This means that the gateway must be
the unique address of a station in a addressed, via which the request is then
network of class X and subnetwork Y. forwarded to the second BDA. The
subnet mask must be obtained from the
The first byte of class A IP addresses network administrator (usually
contains a number from 0 to 127: e.g. 255.255.255.0).
98.x.x.x. This class can support up to
128 subnetworks, each with around 16 BDA IP Address
million connections. Since class A
networks are very limited in number, The BDA must be assigned its own
these addresses are only available for unique IP address that has not been
large global companies and used before so that it can run on the
organizations. A Network Information Ethernet. This address must be in the
Center (NIC) is responsible for assigning same band as the other addresses on
the classes and network numbers. this line. You may have to contact the
network administrator here.
Class B networks (these begin with
128.x.x.x to 191.x.x.x) support up to Gateway IP Address
16,384 subnetworks, each with up to
65,535 stations. The majority of large If an address that is not located in the
companies and providers have a class B subnetwork is addressed in the browser,
address. the request is forwarded to the gateway.
The gateway knows the location to
With around 2.1 million subnetworks, which the request has to be forwarded

6-23

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 The Breaker Data Adapter (BDA) and BDA Plus
Operating Instructions and Troubleshooting

The BDA supports state-of-the-art communications technology. It can be Displaying Data

implemented regardless of the operating system and browser used, and its SENTRON VL and SENTRON WL use
"property bytes", which provide
structured tree and the pages it displays are harmonized with the Switch ES information on the required value, such
as whether it is available, or readable
Power tool. The instructions provided here aim to show you how to make and/or writable. The display then
particular settings. A troubleshooting table is included at the end to help changes depending on the property
byte.
you solve any problems. If a value is not available, for example,
because the circuit-breaker does not
Languages and Help interrupted, the BDA switches to offline have any neutral conductor protection
mode. This also occurs if a file has been (N-conductor protection parameter), it
The BDA interface is in German and
opened under "Parameter transfer" or is displayed as an empty white field with
English. The language is selected every
received from the circuit-breaker. no outline.
time the browser is started. If you want
to switch the language during If a value is available, the system
Offline mode
operation, choose the option "SENTRON differentiates between whether it is
WL/VL" at the top of the tree. The If the BDA is supplied with 24 V DC and only readable or also writable. "Read
language selection window then is not connected to a circuit-breaker, the only" data is displayed in black on a gray
appears on the right-hand side of the BDA starts in offline mode, indicated by background in a black, outlined field. If
screen. the fact that the CubicleBUS LED is not the value is also writable, the
illuminated. Offline mode is used to background is white.
In addition to the HTML pages and Java configure the BDA even if it is not
applets, the BDA stores the Values that are available but not
connected to a circuit-breaker, and save
accompanying help pages in different currently valid are displayed in red. This
this file for later use. Files created by
languages. The help pages can be called could be the case, for example, if the
Switch ES Power can also be opened and
up where they are available via the number of measured values available
edited.
question mark icon in the top right-hand for calculating the long-term mean
To switch from offline to online mode,
corner of the screen. They are available values of the current is insufficient
you first have to connect a
whenever the BDA is activated. because the circuit-breaker has only just
circuit-breaker. You then press either the
The help pages are available in German been switched on.
"Online" or "Send parameters" button in
and English. "Parameter transfer".
Password Protection
Offline/Online Mode
The BDA (and BDA Plus) can be run in
two different operating modes. Parameter: read and writable

Online mode Measured value: read only

Online mode is activated automatically
when the BDA is connected to a Parameter: read only
circuit-breaker. In this mode, the current
operating and diagnostic data, as well Parameter not available
as the parameters are displayed and
loaded directly to the circuit-breaker Measured value not valid
after they have been changed. Online
mode is indicated by a green
c LED. The way data is displayed on the BDA pages depends on the property byte. This
Fig.
If the connection to the circuit-breaker is tells you which data is read only, which data can be written, and which data is
6-19
not available.

6-24

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 All write actions that would result in a Operation Example Comparing Parameters
change to the status or a parameter in This example aims to describe the The parameter comparison function is
the circuit-breaker are password functionality of the BDA. You want to set used to check whether the parameters
protected. This ensures that parameters the PROFIBUS-DP address of the COM15 set in Switch ES Power or the BDA match
cannot be changed and switching is module for a SENTRON WL. To do so, those in the device. The following
impossible without this password. open the Communication node by parameters are checked:
Note: The electronic relays of the choosing "Device Parameters >  Protection parameters A and B
COM15 module are required to switch Circuit-Breaker". Then click the  Extended protection function
the SENTRON WL on and off via the input/output field next to the PROFIBUS parameters
BDA. address and edit it in accordance with
 Threshold value settings
The default password is the new address. Once you have
changed this parameter and exited the  Measurement function settings
"sentron" field, the outline turns blue to indicate  Communication parameters
This can be changed by choosing "Extras parameters that have not yet been  Settings for the configurable output
> Password" in the BDA tree (strongly transferred to the circuit-breaker. module
recommended). You have to enter the You can then change other parameters. The parameter comparison function can
new password twice. When you click If you want to transfer the modified be used, for example, to ensure that the
OK, the BDA asks you for the old parameters to the circuit-breaker, click set parameters are transferred without
password. OK on this page. any errors once they have been
If you have forgotten it, it can be reset If the parameter transfer process is the downloaded to the device.
by means of a master password. To do first write action in this session, the Due to the complex nature of SENTRON
so, contact Technical Assistance at system prompts you to enter the circuit-breakers, it is impossible to judge
SIEMENS AG, A&D CD. password. Once you have entered the accurately whether the parameters and
Tel.: +49 9131 743833 password successfully, the data is settings loaded to the device have
E-mail: nst.technical-assistance@sie transmitted to the circuit-breaker. actually been transferred. This is
mens.com If you want to reset the modified because, for example:
parameters, click the "Undo" button.  BDA just forwards parameter changes.
Whether a parameter is correct can
If you exit the parameters page without
only be verified in the memory
clicking OK, the changes are ignored.
location (e.g. in the trip unit). If this
changes the value because one has
Printing
exceeded the maximum value, for
Since Java applets are used, the normal example, the modified value is
print function in your browser on the reported back to the BDA. This
parameter pages will not provide a discrepancy would be detected when
satisfactory printout. a subsequent parameter comparison
If you want to print the parameters for is performed.
documentation purposes, open the  In the BDA interface, not all
pages to be printed from the tree in the eventualities regarding the
BDA. All the parameter pages are dependencies between
displayed again under "Extras > Print", minimum/maximum values and other
and you can print them individually as parameters are checked. This means
required using the print menu in your that a parameter could be entered
browser. that cannot be copied in the
protection device in its current form.

6-25

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Troubleshooting List
Fault description Solution
Ensure that you are using a fully-assigned null modem cable. With a null
modem cable, pins 2 and 3, 4 and 6, and 7 and 8 must be assigned and
reversed with respect to each other.

Before starting the BDA, disconnect the null modem cable from the BDA
and reboot the BDA (DEVICE LED is green). Then reconnect the cable.
An error message appears (e.g. Modem not initialized, etc.) a
The COM port that you are using on the target system must not be being
PPP connection is established with the BDA.
used by a different application (free it up, if necessary).

Check the modem and data communications connection settings. You

must choose "555". Only the user name "ppp" works.

In the Control Panel, you also have to set the baud rate for the COM
interface that you are using to 115200.
Ensure that the option "Use Java v1.4.0 <applet>" is active in the browser.

Delete the cache memory of the browser.

Open the Java plug-in operator panel in the Control Panel. Check that the
Nothing happens after you select the language on the first
plug-in is active and Version 1.4.0 is selected under "Extended". On the
page.
"Browser" tab page, the browser that you are using must be active, and the
Java VM cache can be deleted to be on the safe side. Then restart the
system.

If the problem persists, remove any older versions of Java you may have.
Check the settings for the gateway, the subnet mask, and the proxy.

Enter the address of the BDA to be addressed in the proxy so that it is not
routed via the proxy. This then only works if the BDA is located in the
network specified by the subnet mask.

You cannot establish a connection to the BDA Plus via the Ping the BDA address to check whether TCP/IP communication is
Ethernet. established to the BDA. If the ping does not work, check the network
configuration again with your network administrator. If the BDA replies to
a ping but not to a request to call up the browser, reset the BDA.

The BDA must have already been booted with a connected Ethernet cable
so that the Ethernet interface is activated. To solve the problem, connect
the active Ethernet cable and boot up the BDA.
The security level of the browser is set to "secure" and stops Java applets
The system displays a message about security settings and the from running, for example. For this reason, you have to reduce the
BDA pages stop loading. security level to a level where the security message no longer appears and
the BDA pages are displayed.
This troubleshooting list helps you solve any problems you may encounter communicating with the BDA. If you have any other
Table
problems, Technical Assistance of SIEMENS AG, A&D CD (+49 9131 743833) will be happy to help.
6-3

6-26

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com
 Data Dictionary

All available data of the SENTRON circuit breakers sorted by

- function groups

- DPV1 data sets

Definition of common and special data format

7
PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com
 Data Dictionary
Introduction and Partition into Function Groups

Die Kommunikation der SENTRON Leistungsschalter ist sehr vielseitig und Format nicht kommunziert werden.
Deshalb wird der MessVal. mit 102 xiert,
flexibel. Die große Anzahl der Datenpunkt kann über Datensätze gelesen kommuniziert wird nun ein Val. von
und teilweise auch geschrieben werden, viele davon können in das zykli- 1500 bis 44000. Auf der Empfängersei-
te (PROFIBUS Master) muss dieser Val.
sche Telegramm integriert werden. Dieses Kapitel widmet sich der detail- nun mit dem Skalierungsfaktor, der dem
Zehnerexpontent entspricht (-2, Multi-
lierten Description der unterschiedlichen Datenpunkte sowie deren Eigen- plikation mit 10-2) multipliziert werden.
schaften. Angegeben wird für den Skalierungsfak-
tor immer der Expontent auf der Emp-
fängerseite.
Allgemein in der Lage, den gewünschten Daten-
Grundlage für das gemeinsame Profil punkt und dessen Eigenschaften zu fin- Abkürzung der Datenpunkt Quellen
der SENTRON Leistungsschalter ist eine den.  ETU = Auslöser
übergreifende Datenbasis, die Datenbi- Im zweiten Teil dieses Kapitels wird der  Metering = Messfunktion oder
bliothek genannt wird. In dieser Daten- Aufbau der les- und schreibbaren ösätze Messfunktion Plus
bibliothek ist festgelegt, welcher Lei- erklärt, die wiederum aus den im vor-  DI = Digitales Eingangsmodul
stungsschalter welche Datenpunkte hergehenden Teil beschriebenen Da-  DO = Digitales Ausgangsmodul
unterstützt. tenpunkten bestehen. Damit können
 BDA = Breaker Data Adapter oder Brea-
Des weiteren sind in der öDatenbiblio- die über den PROFIBUS übertragenen
ker Date Adapter Plus
thekbibliothek auch die Eigenschaften ösätze im Master interpretiert werden.
 BSS = Breaker Status Sensor
aller Datenpunkte beschrieben: Im dritten Teil dieses Kapitels werden
 Konf. DO = Konfigurierbares digitales
 Welche Datenpunktnummer besitzt die unterschiedlichen Formate der Da-
Ausgangsmoduls
dieser Datenpunkt und wie ist sein tenpunkte beschrieben. Dazu gehört die
Name Description des verwendeten Motorola
Einheiten
 Was ist die Source dieses Datenpunk- Formats, von z.B. „int“ und „unsigned
int“ sowie vor allem die Description von Soweit in den Tabellen nicht anders ver-
tes
Spezialformaten. Ein Spezialformat ist merkt, sind alle Ströme in A, alle Span-
 Welches Format hat dieser Daten- nungen in V, alle Leistungen in kW/kVA
z.B. die binäre Aufschlüsselung des Da-
punkt bzw. kvar, alle Energien in MWh bzw.
tenpunktes, der die letzte Auslösung
 Welche Größe besitzt dieser Daten- spezifiziert. Mvarh, alle Temperaturen in °C, alle
punkt Klirr-/Form-/Scheitelfaktoren in % und
 Welche Skalierung besitzt dieser Da- Skalierung alle Frequenzen in Hz, Verzögerungszei-
tenpunkt ten in s (Sekunden). Dies trifft auch auf
Fast alle Messwerte werden nicht im
 In welchem Datensatz ist dieser Da- die min./max. Val.e zu.
Format REAL übertragen, sondern als im
tenpunkt verfügbar Format INT (mit oder ohne Vorzeichen),
 Kann dieser Datenpunkt in das zykli- weil dieses Format nur 2 Byte statt 4
sche Telegramm eingebunden wer- Byte belegt. Dafür muss bei einigen
den Messwerten ein Skalierungsfaktor hin-
In diesem Kapitel werden die Daten- zugefügt werden, damit der übertrage-
punkte der Datenbibliothek beschrie- ne MessVal. korrekt interpretiert wer-
ben. Im ersten Teil werden die Daten- den kann.
punkte in Funktionsklassen Beispiel Frequenz:
zusammengeführt. Funktionsklassen Der Messwert (Datenpunkt 262) variiert
sind z.B. Daten für die Identifikation, zwischen 15,00 und 440,00 Hz. Die
Geräteparamter oder Messwerte. Durch Stellen hinter dem Komma könnten
diese Aufteilung ist der Benutzer schnell ohne eine Skalierung über das INTEGER

7-1

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Data points to control the SENTRON circuit breaker
Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale content of
point (Bit) DS.Byte
Steuert die Speicher (z.B. min/max Val.e) des 18 COM15 COM10 Format (18) 8 - DS51.181
Kommunikationsmoduls DS93.10
Steuert die Ausgänge des Kommunikationsmo- 19 COM15 COM10 Format (19) 8 - DS51.182
duls (z.B. Schalten des Schalters) DS93.11
Datum der letzten Parameteränderung 84 COM15 - Time 64 - DS91.10
System-Time der Leistungsschalter 90 COM15 COM10 Time 64 - DS51.194
DS68.4
Steuert das digitale Ausgangsmodul 1 121 DO1 - Format (121) 8 - DS93.8
Steuert das digitale Ausgangsmodul 2 126 DO2 - Format (121) 8 - DS93.9
Steuert den Auslöser 406 ETU - Format (406) 16 - DS93.4
6 PROFIBUS Bits für das digitale konfigurierbare 426 COM15 - Format (426) 6 - DS69.13
Ausgangsmodul DS93.13
Über die aufgeführten Datenpunkte kann der SENTRON Leistungsschalter gesteuert werden. Das betrifft z.B. das Ein- bzw. das
Tabelle
Ausschalten bzw. sonstige Steuerfunktionen in Richtung des Leistungsschalters und auch zu den c Modulen.
7-1

7-2

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Data points for detailled diagnostic of the SENTRON circuit breaker
Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale content of
point (Bit) DS.Byte
PROFIBUS Schreibschutz (DPWriteEnable) 14 COM15 COM10 Format (14) 1 - DS69.11
Auslösebuch der letzten 5 Auslösungen mit 15 COM15 COM10 Format (15) 480 - DS51.0
Time
Ereignisbuch der letzten 10 Ereignisse mit Time 16 COM15 COM10 Format (16) 960 - DS51.60
DS92.42
Anzahl der Schaltungen unter Last 80 COM15 COM10 unsigned int 16 0 DS91.0
Anzahl der Schaltungen durch Auslöungen 81 COM15 COM10 unsigned int 16 0 DS91.2
Schaltspielzähler (für Schaltzyklus ein/aus) 82 COM15 - unsigned int 16 0 DS91.4
Betriebsstundenzähler (bei Ein + Strom > 0) 83 COM15 - unsigned long 32 0 DS91.6
Anzahl Kurzschlußauslösungen (SI) 104 ETU COM10 unsigned int 16 0 DS91.18
Anzahl Überlastauslösungen (L) 105 ETU COM10 unsigned int 16 0 DS91.20
Anzahl Erdschlußauslösungen (G) 106 ETU COM10 unsigned int 16 0 DS91.22
Summe der abgeschalt. I²t-Val.e L1, L2, L3, N 107 ETU COM10 Format (107) 128 0 DS91.24
Auslösungen durch die Messfunktion/M. Plus 307 Metering - Format (307) 16 - DS92.28
SchwellVal.warnungen 308 Metering - Format (308) 32 - DS92.30
Harmonische von Strom/Spannung bis zur 29. 309 Metering - Format (309) 928 0 DS64.0
Bestellnummer des Auslösers 371 ETU - 18 x char 144 - DS97.126
Time bis zur vermutlichen Überlastauslösung 379 ETU - unsigned int 16 0 DS51.1

Letzte, nicht quittierte Auslösung des Auslöser 401 ETU ETU Format (401) 8 - DS92.26
Aktuell anliegende Warnungen 402 ETU ETU Format (402) 16 - DS92.24
Strom im Abschaltmoment 403 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0(VL) /1 DS92.34
Phase im Abschaltmoment 404 ETU ETU Format (373) 3 - DS92.36
Schalterstellung am digitalen Eingangsmodul 1 111 DI1 - Format (111) 8 - DS69.3
Schalterstellung am digitalen Eingangsmodul 2 115 DI2 - Format (111) 8 - DS69.4
Schalterstellung am digitalen Ausgangsmodul 1 119 DO1 - Format (119) 8 - DS69.5
Schalterstellung am digitalen Ausgangsmodul 2 124 DO2 - Format (119) 8 - DS69.6
Zeigt die höchstebelastete Phase an 373 ETU ETU Format (373) 3 - DS51.183
Position des Leistungsschalter im Rahmen 24 COM15 COM10 Format (24) 4 - DS100.202
DS92.37
Module, die am c angeschl. sind 88 COM15 - Format (88) 32 - DS92.20
DS91.48
Status der Eingänge des dig. Eingangsmoduls 1 110 DI1 - Hex 8 - DS69.0
Status der Eingänge des dig. Eingangsmoduls 2 114 DI2 - Hex 8 - DS69.1
Status der Ausgänge des dig. Ausgangsmoduls 1 118 DO1 - Hex 8 - DS68.14
Status der Ausgänge des dig. Ausgangsmoduls 2 123 DO2 - Hex 8 - DS68.15
Status des angeschlossenen PROFIBUS 17 COM15 COM10 Format (17) 3 - DS51.180
Status Leistungsschalter (Ein/Aus/Gespannt etc.) 328 BSS COM10 Format (328) 8 - DS51.203
DS92.40
Wartungsinformation zu den Hauptkontakten 405 ETU - Format (405) 2 - DS91.40
Die SENTRON Leistungsschalter stellen viele ö zur detaillierten Diagnose zur Verfügung. In der obigen Tabelle sind diese Diagnose
Tabelle
Datenpunkte aufgeführt.
7-2

7-3

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Data points for the identification of the SENTRON circuit breaker
Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale content of
point (Bit) DS.Byte
Anwendertext (frei editierbar) 20 COM15 - 64 x char 512 - DS165.4
Anlagenkennzeichen (frei editierbar) 21 COM15 - 64 x char 512 - DS165.68
Datum (frei editierbar) 22 COM15 - Time 64 - DS165.132
Autor (frei editierbar) 23 COM15 - 30 x char 240 - DS165.140
Identnummer des COM15/COM10 91 COM15 COM10 16 x char 128 - DS162.4
Markt, in dem der Auslöser eingesetzt wird 95 ETU - Format (95) 2 - DS97.47
Identnummer des Leistungsschalters 96 ETU - 20 x char 160 - DS97.48
Prüfdatum Schalter 98 ETU - Time 64 - DS97.74
DS100.4
Schaltleistungsklasse 99 ETU - Format (99) 4 - DS97.82
Baugröße 100 ETU Format (100) 2 - DS97.83
Nennspannung (LL) des Leistungsschalters 101 ETU - unsigned int 16 0 DS97.84
Bemessungsstrom des externen g-Wandlers 102 ETU - unsigned int 16 0 DS97.86
DS129.70
Bestellnummer Leistungsschalter (beim SEN- 103 ETU ETU Format (103) 160 - DS162.20
TRON VL ist hier d. Bestellnummer des Auslöser) DS97.88
Polzahl des Leistungsschalters 108 ETU ETU Format (108) 3 - DS97.144
Typ (Messfunktion, Messfunktion Plus) 138 Metering - Format (138) 8 - DS162.40
Bemessungsstromstecker (Rating Plug) 377 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0 DS51.208
DS97.146
Leistungsschalter Rahmen (Frame) 378 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0 DS97.148
Bestellnummer des Auslöser 407 ETU ETU 16 x char 144 - DS97.0
Herstellungsdatum des Auslöser 408 ETU - Time 64 - DS97.18
Identnummer des Auslösers 409 ETU ETU 17 x char 136 - DS97.26
N-Wandler angeschlossen 411 ETU ETU Format (411) 1 - DS97.45
Typ des Auslöser 412 ETU ETU Format (412) 5 - DS162.41
Bestellnummer COM10 424 - COM10 16 x char 128 - DS97.154
Seriennummer COM10 425 - COM10 16 x char 128 - DS97.170
Bei einer Kommunikation ist die korrekte Identifikation des Zielgeräte besonders wichtig. Die SENTRON Leistungsschalter stellen
Tabelle
dafür eine Fülle von Informationen zur Verfügung.
7-3

7-4

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Data points for measured currents
Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale content of
point (Bit) DS.Byte
Phasenunsymmetrie Strom (in %) 172 Metering ETU unsigned char 8 0 DS94.0
LangTimemittelVal. Strom 3-phasig 193 Metering ETU unsigned int 16 0 DS94.2
LangTimemittelVal. Strom L1 194 Metering ETU unsigned int 16 0 DS94.4
LangTimemittelVal. Strom L2 195 Metering ETU unsigned int 16 0 DS94.6
LangTimemittelVal. Strom L3 196 Metering ETU unsigned int 16 0 DS94.8
Minimum LangTimemittelVal. Strom 244 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS72.24
Maximum LangTimemittelVal. Strom 245 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS72.26
Strom der höchstbelasteten Phase 374 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0 DS51.186
Strom im Neutralleiter 375 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0 DS51.190
DS94.18
Strom, der zur Erde abfließt 376 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0 DS51.192
DS94.20
Strom in der Phase 1 380 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0 DS94.10
Strom in der Phase 2 381 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0 DS94.12
Strom in der Phase 3 382 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0 DS94.14
MittelVal. Strom über die drei Phasen 383 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0 DS94.16
Minimaler Strom in der Phase 1 384 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0 DS72.0
Maximaler Strom in der Phase 1 385 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0 DS72.2
Minimaler Strom in der Phase 2 386 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0 DS72.4
Maximaler Strom in der Phase 2 387 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0 DS72.6
Minimaler Strom in der Phase 3 388 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0 DS72.8
Maximaler Strom in der Phase 3 389 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0 DS72.10
Minimaler Strom im Neutralleiter 390 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0 DS72.12
Maximaler Strom im Neutralleiter 391 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0 DS72.14
Minimaler Strom, der zur Erde abfließt 392 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0 DS72.16
Maximaler Strom, der zur Erde abfließt 393 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0 DS72.18
Minimaler MittelVal. über die drei Phasen 394 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0 DS72.20
Maximaler MittelVal. über die drei Phasen 395 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0 DS72.22
Die SENTRON Leistungsschalter stellen vielen Messwerte zur Verfügung. Um die ö übersichtlich darzustellen, wurden sie struktu-
Tabelle
riert. In dieser Tabelle sind die Messwerte für die Ströme aller Art aufgelistet.
7-4

7-5

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Data points for measured voltages
Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale content of
point (Bit) DS.Byte
Phasenunsymmetrie Spannung (in %) 173 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS94.22
Verkettete Spannung zwischen Phase L1 und L2 197 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS94.24
Verkettete Spannung zwischen Phase L2 und L3 198 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS94.26
Verkettete Spannung zwischen Phase L3 und L1 199 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS94.28
Sternätspannung Phase L1 200 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS94.30
Sternätspannung Phase L2 201 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS94.32
Sternätspannung Phase L3 202 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS94.34
MittelVal. der verketteten Spannung 203 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS94.36
MittelVal. der Sternätspannung 204 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS94.38
Minimum der verketteten Spannung zwischen 205 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS73.0
Phase L1 und Phase L2
Maximum der verketteten Spannung zwischen 206 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS73.2
Phase L1 und Phase L2
Minimum der verketteten Spannung zwischen 207 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS73.4
Phase L2 und Phase L3
Maximum der verketteten Spannung zwischen 208 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS73.6
Phase L2 und Phase L3
Minimum der verketteten Spannung zwischen 209 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS73.8
Phase L3 und Phase L1
Maximum der verketteten Spannung zwischen 210 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS73.10
Phase L3 und Phase L1
Minimum der Sternätspannung Phase L1 211 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS73.12
Maximum der Sternätspannung Phase L1 212 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS73.14
Minimum der Sternätspannung Phase L2 213 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS73.16
Maximum der Sternätspannung Phase L2 214 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS73.18
Minimum der Sternätspannung Phase L3 215 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS73.20
Maximum der Sternätspannung Phase L3 216 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS73.22
Die SENTRON Leistungsschalter stellen vielen Messwerte zur Verfügung. Um die ö übersichtlich darzustellen, wurden sie struktu-
Tabelle
riert. In dieser Tabelle sind die Messwerte für die Spannungen aller Art aufgelistet.
7-5

7-6

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Data points for measured power
Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale content of
point (Bit) DS.Byte
Summe der Scheinleistungen 217 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS94.40
Scheinleistung in der Phase L1 218 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS94.62
Scheinleistung in der Phase L2 219 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS94.64
Scheinleistung in der Phase L3 220 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS94.66
Summe der Wirkleistungen 221 Metering - signed int 16 0 DS94.42
Wirkleistung in der Phase L1 222 Metering - signed int 16 0 DS94.44
Wirkleistung in der Phase L2 223 Metering - signed int 16 0 DS94.46
Wirkleistung in der Phase L3 224 Metering - signed int 16 0 DS94.48
Summe der Blindleistungen 225 Metering - signed int 16 0 DS94.50
Blindleistung in der Phase L1 226 Metering - signed int 16 0 DS94.76
Blindleistung in der Phase L2 227 Metering - signed int 16 0 DS94.78
Blindleistung in der Phase L3 228 Metering - signed int 16 0 DS94.80
LangTimemittelVal. der Wirkleistung 3-phasig 229 Metering - signed int 16 0 DS94.52
LangTimemittelVal. der Wirkleistung in der 230 Metering - signed int 16 0 DS94.54
PhaseL1
LangTimemittelVal. der Wirkleistung in der 231 Metering - signed int 16 0 DS94.56
Phase L2
LangTimemittelVal. der Wirkleistung in der 232 Metering - signed int 16 0 DS94.58
Phase L3
LangTimemittelVal. der Scheinleistung 3-phasig 233 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS94.60
LangTimemittelVal. der Scheinleistung in der 234 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS94.68
Phase L1
LangTimemittelVal. der Scheinleistung in der 235 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS94.70
Phase L2
LangTimemittelVal. der Scheinleistung in der 236 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS94.72
Phase L3
LangTimemittelVal. der Blindleistung 3-phasig 237 Metering - signed int 16 0 DS94.74
Minimum des MittelVal.es der Scheinleistung 246 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS74.4
Maximum des MittelVal.es Scheinleistung 247 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS74.6
Minimum des MittelVal.es der Blindleistung 248 Metering - signed int 16 0 DS74.12
Maximum des MittelVal.es der Blindeistung 249 Metering - signed int 16 0 DS74.14
Minimum des MittelVal.es der Wirkleistung 250 Metering - signed int 16 0 DS74.8
Maximum des MittelVal.es der Wirkleistung 251 Metering - signed int 16 0 DS74.10
Die SENTRON Leistungsschalter stellen vielen Messwerte zur Verfügung. Um die ö übersichtlich darzustellen, wurden sie struktu-
Tabelle
riert. In dieser Tabelle sind die Messwerte für die Leistungen aller Art aufgelistet.
7-6

7-7

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Data points for all other measured values (power factor, temperature, frequency, energy etc.)
Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale content of
point (Bit) DS.Byte
MittelVal. des Leistungsfaktors 168 Metering - signed int 16 -3 DS51.184
DS94.98
Leistungsfaktor in der Phase L1 169 Metering - signed int 16 -3 DS94.100
Leistungsfaktor in der Phase L2 170 Metering - signed int 16 -3 DS94.102
Leistungsfaktor in der Phase L3 171 Metering - signed int 16 -3 DS94.104
Minimum des MittelVal.s des Leistungsfaktors 242 Metering - signed int 16 -3 DS74.0
Maximum des MittelVal.s des Leistungsfaktors 243 Metering - signed int 16 -3 DS74.2
Temperatur im Schaltschrank (gem. im COM15) 71 COM15 - unsigned char 8 0 DS94.114
Minimale Temperatur im Schaltschrank 72 COM15 - unsigned char 8 0 DS77.0
Maximale Temperatur im Schaltschrank 73 COM15 - unsigned char 8 0 DS77.1
Temperatur im Leistungsschalter (gem. im BSS) 330 BSS - unsigned char 8 0 DS94.115
Minimale Temperatur im Leistungsschalter 74 BSS - unsigned char 8 0 DS77.2
Maximale Temperatur im Leistungsschalter 75 BSS - unsigned char 8 0 DS77.3
Wirkarbeit in Normalrichtung 238 Metering - unsigned long 32 0 DS94.82
Wirkarbeit gegen die Normalrichtung 239 Metering - unsigned long 32 0 DS94.86
Blindarbeit in Normalrichtung 240 Metering - unsigned long 32 0 DS94.90
Blindarbeit gegen die Normalrichtung 241 Metering - unsigned long 32 0 DS94.94
Frequenz 262 Metering COM10 unsigned int 16 -2 DS94.106
Minimum der Frequenz 252 Metering COM10 unsigned int 16 -2 DS76.2
Maximum der Frequenz 253 Metering COM10 unsigned int 16 -2 DS76.0
Klirrfaktor des Stromes 254 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS94.108
Minimum des Klirrfaktors des Stromes 255 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS76.4
Maximum des Klirrfaktors des Stromes 256 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS76.5
Klirrfaktor der Spannung 257 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS94.109
Minimum des Klirrfaktors der Spannung 258 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS76.6
Maximum des Klirrfaktors der Spannung 259 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS76.7
Scheitelfaktor 260 Metering - unsigned char 8 -1 DS94.111
Minimum des Scheitelfaktors 263 Metering - unsigned char 8 -1 DS72.28
Maximum des Scheitelfaktors 264 Metering - unsigned char 8 -1 DS72.29
Formfaktor 261 Metering - unsigned char 8 -1 DS94.110
Minimum des Formfaktors 265 Metering - unsigned char 8 -1 DS72.30
Maximum des Formfaktors 266 Metering - unsigned char 8 -1 DS72.31
Die SENTRON Leistungsschalter stellen vielen Messwerte zur Verfügung. Um die ö übersichtlich darzustellen, wurden sie struktu-
Tabelle
riert. In dieser Tabelle sind die Messwerte aller Art aufgelistet, die sonst noch nicht augeführt wurden.
7-7

7-8

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Data point for the timestamps (TS) of the measured values part 1
Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale content of
point (Bit) DS.Byte
TS TS Minimaler Strom in der Phase 1 25 COM15 COM10 Time 64 - DS72.32
TS Maximaler Strom in der Phase 1 26 COM15 COM10 Time 64 - DS72.40
TS Minimaler Strom in der Phase 2 27 COM15 COM10 Time 64 - DS72.48
TS Maximaler Strom in der Phase 2 28 COM15 COM10 Time 64 - DS72.56
TS Minimaler Strom in der Phase 3 29 COM15 COM10 Time 64 - DS72.64
TS Maximaler Strom in der Phase 3 30 COM15 COM10 Time 64 - DS72.72
TS Minimaler Strom im Neutralleiter 33 COM15 COM10 Time 64 - DS72.112
TS Maximaler Strom im Neutralleiter 34 COM15 COM10 Time 64 - DS72.120
TS Minimaler Strom, der zur Erde abfließt 35 COM15 COM10 Time 64 - DS72.128
TS Maximaler Strom, der zur Erde abfließt 36 COM15 COM10 Time 64 - DS72.136
TS Minimaler MittelVal. über die drei Phasen 31 COM15 COM10 Time 64 - DS72.80
TS Maximaler MittelVal. über die drei Phasen 32 COM15 COM10 Time 64 - DS72.88
TS Minimum LangTimemittelVal. Strom 55 COM15 - Time 64 - DS72.96
TS Maximum LangTimemittelVal. Strom 56 COM15 - Time 64 - DS72.104
TS Minimum der verketteten Spannung zwi- 37 COM15 - Time 64 - DS73.24
schen Phase L1 und Phase L2
TS Maximum der verketteten Spannung zwi- 38 COM15 - Time 64 - DS73.32
schen Phase L1 und Phase L2
TS Minimum der verketteten Spannung zwi- 39 COM15 - Time 64 - DS73.40
schen Phase L2 und Phase L3
TS Maximum der verketteten Spannung zwi- 40 COM15 - Time 64 - DS73.48
schen Phase L2 und Phase L3
TS Minimum der verketteten Spannung zwi- 41 COM15 - Time 64 - DS73.56
schen Phase L3 und Phase L1
TS Maximum der verketteten Spannung zwi- 42 COM15 - Time 64 - DS73.64
schen Phase L3 und Phase L1
TS Minimum der Sternätspannung Phase L1 43 COM15 - Time 64 - DS73.72
TS Maximum der Sternätspannung Phase L1 44 COM15 - Time 64 - DS73.80
TS Minimum der Sternätspannung Phase L2 45 COM15 - Time 64 - DS73.88
TS Maximum der Sternätspannung Phase L2 46 COM15 - Time 64 - DS73.96
TS Minimum der Sternätspannung Phase L3 47 COM15 - Time 64 - DS73.104
TS Maximum der Sternätspannung Phase L3 48 COM15 - Time 64 - DS73.112
TS Minimum d. MittelVal.es der Scheinleistung 57 COM15 - Time 64 - DS74.16
TS Maximum des MittelVal.es Scheinleistung 58 COM15 - Time 64 - DS74.24
TS Minimum des MittelVal.es der Wirkleistung 49 COM15 - Time 64 - DS74.32
TS Maximum des MittelVal.es der Wirkleistung 50 COM15 - Time 64 - DS74.40
TS Minimum des MittelVal.es der Blindleistung 51 COM15 - Time 64 - DS74.48
TS Maximum des MittelVal.es der Blindeistung 52 COM15 - Time 64 - DS74.56
Die SENTRON Leistungsschalter stellen vielen Messwerte zur Verfügung. Um die ö übersichtlich darzustellen, wurden sie struktu-
Tabelle
riert. In dieser Tabelle sind die Timestempel der Messwerte aller Art aufgelistet. Teil 1
7-8

7-9

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Data point for the timestamps (TS) of the measured values part 2
Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale content of
point (Bit) DS.Byte
TS Min. des MittelVal.s des Leistungsfaktors 53 COM15 - Time 64 - DS74.64
TS Max. des MittelVal.s des Leistungsfaktors 54 COM15 - Time 64 - DS74.72
TS Minimale Temperatur im Schaltschrank 76 COM15 - Time 64 - DS77.4
TS Maximale Temperatur im Schaltschrank 77 COM15 - Time 64 - DS77.12
TS Minimale Temperatur im Leistungsschalter 78 COM15 - Time 64 - DS77.20
TS Maximale Temperatur im Leistungsschalter 79 COM15 - Time 64 - DS77.28
TS Minimum der Frequenz 59 COM15 - Time 64 - DS76.8
TS Maximum der Frequenz 60 COM15 - Time 64 - DS76.16
TS Minimum des Klirrfaktors des Stromes 61 COM15 - Time 64 - DS76.24
TS Maximum des Klirrfaktors des Stromes 62 COM15 - Time 64 - DS76.32
TS Minimum des Klirrfaktors der Spannung 63 COM15 - Time 64 - DS76.40
TS Maximum des Klirrfaktors der Spannung 64 COM15 - Time 64 - DS76.48
TS Minimum des Scheitelfaktors 65 COM15 - Time 64 - DS72.144
TS Maximum des Scheitelfaktors 66 COM15 - Time 64 - DS72.152
TS Minimum des Formfaktors 67 COM15 - Time 64 - DS72.160
TS Maximum des Formfaktors 68 COM15 - Time 64 - DS72.168
Die SENTRON Leistungsschalter stellen vielen Messwerte zur Verfügung. Um die ö übersichtlich darzustellen, wurden sie struktu-
Tabelle
riert. In dieser Tabelle sind die Timestempel der Messwerte aller Art aufgelistet. Teil 2
7-9

7-10

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Parameter for the SENTRON circuit breaker (primary protective function) part 1
Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale content of
point (Bit) DS.Byte
Aktiver Parametersatz 370 ETU - Format (370) 1 - DS129.65
Trägheitsklasse (nur SENTRON VL LCD ETU40M) 331 - ETU Format (331) 8 0 DS129.68
Überlastparameter IR Parametersatz A (PS A) 333 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0 DS129.4

Trägheitsgrad tR PS A 335 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 -1 DS129.8

Kurzschlussschutz unverzögert Ii PS A 336 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 1/ 0(VL) DS129.10

Kurzschlussschutz verzögert Isd PS A 337 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 1/ 0(VL) DS129.12

VerzögerungsTime Kurzschlussschutz tsd PS A 338 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 -3 DS129.14

Überlastschutz Neutralleiter IN PS A (WL) 334 ETU - unsigned int 16 0 DS129.6

Überlastschutz Neutralleiter IN (VL) 365 - ETU unsigned char 8 0 DS129.66

Erdschlussschutz Ig1 PS A 339 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0 DS129.16

VerzögerungsTime Erdschluss tg1 PS A 340 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 -3 DS129.18

Erdschlussschutz Ig2 PS A 341 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0 DS129.20

VerzögerungsTime Erdschluss tg2 PS A 342 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 -3 DS129.22

I4t Kennlinie für den Überlastschutz PS A 345 ETU - Format (345) 1 - DS129.26
2
I t Kennlinie für verz. Kurzschlussschutz PS A 343 ETU ETU Format (343) 1 - DS129.24

I2t Kennlinie für Erdschlussschutz PS A 344 ETU ETU Format (344) 1 - DS129.25

Thermisches Gedächtnis PS A 346 ETU ETU Format (346) 1 - DS129.27

Phasenausfallempfindlichkeit PS A 347 ETU - Format (347) 1 - DS129.28
AbkühlTimekonstante PS A 348 ETU - unsigned int 16 0 DS129.30
Überlastparameter IR Parametersatz B (PS B) 349 ETU - unsigned int 16 0 DS129.32

Trägheitsgrad tR PS B 351 ETU - unsigned int 16 -1 DS129.36

Kurzschlussschutz unverzögert Ii PS B 352 ETU - unsigned int 16 1 DS129.38

Kurzschlussschutz verzögert Isd PS B 353 ETU - unsigned int 16 1 DS129.40

VerzögerungsTime Kurzschlussschutz tsd PS B 354 ETU - unsigned int 16 -3 DS129.42

Überlastschutz Neutralleiter IN PS B 350 ETU - unsigned int 16 0 DS129.34

Erdschlussschutz Ig1 PS B 355 ETU - unsigned int 16 0 DS129.44

VerzögerungsTime Erdschluss tg1 PS B 356 ETU - unsigned int 16 -3 DS129.46

Erdschlussschutz Ig2 PS B 357 ETU - unsigned int 16 0 DS129.48

VerzögerungsTime Erdschluss tg2 PS B 358 ETU - unsigned int 16 -3 DS129.50

I4t Kennlinie für den Überlastschutz PS B 361 ETU - Format (345) 1 - DS129.54

I2t Kennlinie für verz. Kurzschlussschutz PS B 359 ETU - Format (343) 1 - DS129.52

I2t Kennlinie für Erdschlussschutz PS B 360 ETU - Format (344) 1 - DS129.53

Thermisches Gedächtnis PS B 362 ETU - Format (346) 1 - DS129.55

Phasenausfallempfindlichkeit PS B 363 ETU - Format (347) 1 - DS129.56
AbkühlTimekonstante PS B 364 ETU - unsigned int 16 0 DS129.58
Die Schutzparameter können je nach Ausstattung des Schalters sowohl gelesen als auch geschrieben werden. Der SENTRON WL
Tabelle
stellt zwei Parametersätze mit gleichnamigen Parametern zur Verfügung. Zur Unterscheidung wurde ein PS A für Parametersatz A
7-10
und ein PS B für Parametersatz B angehängt. Teil 1

7-11

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Parameter for the SENTRON circuit breaker (primary protective function) part 2
Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale content of
point (Bit) DS.Byte
Lastabwurf 367 ETU - unsigned int 16 0 DS129.60
Lastaufnahme 368 ETU - unsigned int 16 0 DS129.62
VerzögerungsTime Lastabwurf/-aufnahme 366 ETU - unsigned char 8 0 DS129.64
Überlast Voralarm (nur VL) 369 - ETU unsigned int 16 0 DS128.44
Über die Parameter Lastabwurf und Lastaufnahme können zwei Schwellen eingestellt werden, die mit der VerzögerungsTime
Tabelle
belegt werden können. Beim Über- bzw. Unterschreiten erfolgt ein Warnmeldung von der ETU.
7-11

Parameter for the SENTRON circuit breaker (extended protective function)

Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale content of
point (Bit) DS.Byte
Unsymmetrie Strom 139 Metering ETU unsigned char 8 0 DS128.41
VerzögerungsTime für Unsymmetrie Strom 140 Metering ETU unsigned char 8 0 DS128.42
Wirkleistung in Normalrichtung 141 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS128.14
VerzögerungsTime für Wirkleistung in Normal- 142 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS128.18
richtung
Wirkleistung gegen Normalrichtung 143 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS128.16
VerzögerungsTime für Wirkleistung gegen Nor- 144 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS128.19
malrichtung
Unterfrequenz 147 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS128.22
VerzögerungsTime für Unterfrequenz 148 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS128.25
Überfrequenz 149 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS128.26
VerzögerungsTime für Überfrequenz 150 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS128.24
Unsymmetrie Spannung 151 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS128.32
VerzögerungsTime für Unsymmetrie Spannung 152 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS128.33
Unterspannung 153 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS128.34
VerzögerungsTime für Unterspannung 154 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS128.38
Überspannung 155 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS128.36
VerzögerungsTime für Überspannung 156 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS128.39
Klirrfaktor des Stromes 158 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS128.28
VerzögerungsTime für Klirrfaktors des Stromes 159 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS128.29
Klirrfaktor der Spannung 160 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS128.30
VerzögerungsTime des Klirrfaktors der Span- 161 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS128.31
nung
Mit der erweiterten Schutzfunktion stehen weitere Kriterien zum Schutz der nachgeschalteten Anlagen bzw. Verbraucher zur Ver-
Tabelle
fügung. Fast ausnahmslos lassen sich alle zusätzlichen Auslösebedingungen Timeverzögern, um kurze Störzustände zu überbrük-
7-12
ken.

7-12

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Parameter for the SENTRON circuit breaker (setpoint warnings) part 1
Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale content of
point (Bit) DS.Byte
Überstrom 267 Metering ETU unsigned int 16 0 DS130.48
VerzögerungsTime für Überstrom 268 Metering ETU unsigned char 8 0 DS130.56
Strom, der gegen Erde fließt 269 Metering ETU unsigned int 16 0 DS130.50
VerzögerungsTime des Stromes, der gegen Erde 270 Metering ETU unsigned char 8 0 DS130.57
fließt
Überstrom im Neutralleiter 271 Metering ETU unsigned int 8 0 DS130.52
VerzögerungsTime für Überstrom im Neutrallei- 272 Metering ETU unsigned char 8 0 DS130.58
ter
Phasenunsymmetrie Strom 273 Metering ETU unsigned char 8 0 DS130.59
VerzögerungsTime für Phasenunsym. Strom 274 Metering ETU unsigned char 8 0 DS130.60
LangTimemittelVal. des Stromes 275 Metering ETU unsigned int 16 0 DS130.54
VerzögerungsTime für den LangTimemittelVal. 276 Metering ETU unsigned char 8 0 DS130.61
des Stromes
Unterspannung 277 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS130.62
VerzögerungsTime für die Unterspannung 278 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS130.64
Phasenunsymmetrie Spannung 279 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS130.65
VerzögerungsTime für Phasenunsym. Spannung 280 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS130.66
Überspannung 281 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS130.68
VerzögerungsTime für die Überspannung 282 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS130.70
Wirkleistung in Normalrichtung 283 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS130.4
VerzögerungsTime für die Wirkleistung in Nor- 284 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS130.12
malrichtung
Wirkleistung gegen Normalrichtung 285 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS130.6
VerzögerungsTime für die Wirkleistung gegen 286 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS130.13
Normalrichtung
Leistungsfaktor kapazitiv 287 Metering - signed int 16 -3 DS130.8
VerzögerungsTime für Leistungsfaktor kapazitiv 288 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS130.14
Leistungsfaktor induktiv 289 Metering - signed int 16 -3 DS130.10
VerzögerungsTime für Leistungsfaktor induktiv 290 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS130.15
LangTimemittelVal. Wirkleistung 291 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS130.30
VerzögerungsTime für den LangTimemittelVal. 292 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS130.34
der Wirkleistung
LangTimemittelVal. Scheinleistung 293 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS130.32
VerzögerungsTime für den LangTimemittelVal. 294 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS130.35
der Scheinleistung
LangTimemittelVal. Blindleistung 295 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS130.36
VerzögerungsTime für den LangTimemittelVal. 296 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS130.40
der Blindleistung
Blindleistung in Normalrichtung 297 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS130.38
VerzögerungsTime für die Blindleistung in Nor- 298 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS130.41
malrichtung
Die meisten SchwellVal.e stehen nur beim SENTRON WL mit Messfunktion oder Messfunktion Plus zur Verfügung. Ist ein Schwell-
Tabelle
Val. aktiviert, dann wird beim Überschreiten der eingestellten Schwelle und dem Ablauf der VerzögerungsTime eine Schwell-
7-13
Val.warnung ausgegeben.

7-13

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Parameter for the SENTRON circuit breaker (setpoint warnings) part 2
Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale content of
point (Bit) DS.Byte
Blindleistung gegen Normalrichtung 299 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS130.42
VerzögerungsTime für die Blindleistung gegen 300 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS130.46
Normalrichtung
Scheinleistung 301 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS130.44
VerzögerungsTime für die Scheinleistung 302 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS130.47
Überfrequenz 303 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS130.16
VerzögerungsTime für die Überfrequenz 304 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS130.17
Unterfrequenz 305 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS130.18
VerzögerungsTime für die Unterfrequenz 306 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS130.19
Klirrfaktor Strom 319 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS130.20
VerzögerungsTime für den Klirrfaktor Strom 320 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS130.21
Klirrfaktor Spannung 321 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS130.22
VerzögerungsTime für den Klirrfaktor Spannung 322 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS130.23
Scheitelfaktor 323 Metering - unsigned int 16 -2 DS130.24
VerzögerungsTime für den Scheitelfaktor 324 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS130.28
Formfaktor 325 Metering - unsigned int 16 -2 DS130.26
VerzögerungsTime für den Formfaktor 326 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS130.29
Die meisten SchwellVal.e stehen nur beim SENTRON WL mit Messfunktion oder Messfunktion Plus zur Verfügung. Ist ein Schwell-
Tabelle
Val. aktiviert, dann wird beim Überschreiten der eingestellten Schwelle und dem Ablauf der VerzögerungsTime eine Schwell-
7-14
Val.warnung ausgegeben.

7-14

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Parameter for the SENTRON circuit breaker (communication, metering settings etc.)
Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale content of
point (Bit) DS.Byte
PROFIBUS Adresse 5 COM15 COM10 unsigned int 8 0 DS160.5
Basistyp der PROFIBUS öübertragung 6 COM15 COM10 Hex 2 - DS160.6
ö im zyklischen Profil des PROFIBUS 7 COM15 COM10 Format (7) 224 - DS160.8
IP Adresse des BDA/BDA Plus 10 BDA - Format (10) 40 - DS160.42
Belegung des konfig. dig. Ausgangsmoduls 129 konf. DO - Format (129) 168 - DS128.46
Normale Einspeiserichtung 145 Metering - Format (145) 1 - DS128.20
Phasendrehsinn 146 Metering - Format (146) 1 - DS128.21
Spannungswandleranschluss primärseitig in 162 Metering - Format (162) 1 - DS128.4
Stern oder Dreieck
Nennspannung des Netzes (primärseitig) 164 Metering - unsigned int 16 0 DS128.6
Sekundärspannung des Wandlers 165 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS128.8
Length der Periode für die LangTimemittel- 166 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS128.9
Val.berechnung
Anzahl der Subperioden für die LangTimemittel- 167 Metering - unsigned char 8 0 DS128.10
Val.berechnung
Untergrenze der Stromübertragung 372 ETU - unsigned int 16 0 DS128.12
Erdschluß Wandlererfassungsart 410 ETU ETU Format (410) 2 - DS97.44
DS129.69
Alle Parameter, die noch nicht in den anderen Kategorien aufgezählt sind, wurden in dieser Tabelle eingefügt. Dazu gehören
Tabelle
Parameter für die Kommunikation, für die Einstellungen der Messwerterfassung etc.
7-15

7-15

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Data Dictionary
Content of the DPV1 data sets

Über den PROFIBUS kommunziert der SENTRON Leistungsschalter in einer Die Erklärung der Datensätze erfolgt in
chronologisch aufsteigender Reihenfol-
zyklischen Verbindung mit einem Master Klasse 1, z.B. eine SPS. Zusätzlich ge. Im Kopf der Tabelle ist jeweils auch
zu den Daten im zyklischen Kanal kann der Master ereignisgesteuert wei- vermerkt, ob dieser Datensatz gelesen
und geschrieben werden kann.
tere Daten in Form von DPV1 Datensätzen anfragen. Ein Schreiben und

Steuern über DPV1 Datensätze ist ebenfalls möglich. Dieser Abschnitt be-

schäftigt sich mit der detaillierten Description dieser Datensätze.

DS0: S7-V1 System diagnostic (Length 4 Byte, read only)

Byte Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale
point (Bit)
0 0x0F, wenn eine externe Diagnose vorliegt - COM15 COM10 - 8 -
0x00, wenn keine externe Diagnose vorliegt
1 Steht fest auf 0x03 - COM15 COM10 - 8 -
2 Steht fest auf 0x00 - COM15 COM10 - 8 -
3 Steht fest auf 0x00 - COM15 COM10 - 8 -
Der ösatz 0 enthält die Information, ob der Slave eine externe Diagnose meldet.
Tabelle
7-16

DS1: System diagnostic (Length 16 Byte, read only)

Byte Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale
point (Bit)
0 Identisch zum DS0 - COM15 COM10 - 32 -
4 Kanaltyp; Val. 0x7D - COM15 COM10 - 8 -
5 Length der Kanaldiagnose; Val. 0x20 - COM15 COM10 - 8 -
6 Kanalanzahl; Val. 0x01 - COM15 COM10 - 8 -
7 Pro Kanal 1 Bit; Val. 0x01 - COM15 COM10 - 8 -
8 Reserved; Val. 0x00 - COM15 COM10 - 64 -
Über den ösatz DS1 kann die Systemdiagnose ausgelesen werden. Er hat eine Lönge von 16 Byte und beinhaltet in den ersten vier
Tabelle
Byte den Inhalt des DS0. Weitere Informationen zur Diagnose sind im DS92 vorhanden.
7-17

7-16

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 DS51: Main overview (Length 238 Byte, read only)
Byte Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale
point (Bit)
0 Auslösebuch der letzten 5 Auslösungen mit Time 15 COM15 COM10 Format (15) 480 -
60 Ereignisbuch der letzten 10 Ereignisse mit Time 16 COM15 COM10 Format (16) 960 -
180 Status des angeschlossenen PROFIBUS 17 COM15 COM10 Format (17) 3 -
181 Steuert die Speicher (z.B. min/max Val.e) des Kom- 18 COM15 COM10 Format (18) 8 -
munikationsmoduls
182 Steuert die Ausgänge des Kommunikationsmoduls 19 COM15 COM10 Format (19) 8 -
(z.B. Schalten des Schalters)
183 Zeigt die höchstebelastete Phase an 373 ETU ETU Format (373) 3 -
184 MittelVal. des Leistungsfaktors 168 Metering - signed int 16 -3
186 Strom der höchstbelasteten Phase 374 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0
188 Time bis zur vermutlichen Überlastauslösung 379 ETU - unsigned int 16 0
190 Strom im Neutralleiter 375 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0
192 Strom, der zur Erde abfließt 376 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0
194 System-Time der Leistungsschalter 90 COM15 COM10 Time 64 -
202 Position des Leistungsschalter im Rahmen 24 COM15 COM10 Format (24) 4 -
203 Status Leistungsschalter (Ein/Aus/Gespannt etc.) 328 BSS COM10 Format (328) 8 -
204 Überlastparameter IR Parametersatz A (PS A) 333 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0

206 Überlastparameter IR Parametersatz B (PS B) 349 ETU - unsigned int 16 0

208 Bemessungsstromstecker (Rating Plug) 377 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0

210 Aktiver Parametersatz 370 ETU - Format (370) 1 -
211 Reserved - - - - 72 -
220 Property for Byte 0 - COM15 COM10 EB 8 -
221 Property for Byte 60 - COM15 COM10 EB 8 -
222 Property for Byte 180 - COM15 COM10 EB 8 -
223 Property for Byte 181 - COM15 COM10 EB 8 -
224 Property for Byte 182 - COM15 COM10 EB 8 -
225 Property for Byte 183 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
226 Property for Byte 184 - Metering - EB 8 -
227 Property for Byte 186 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
228 Property for Byte 188 - ETU - EB 8 -
229 Property for Byte 190 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
230 Property for Byte 192 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
231 Property for Byte 194 - COM15 COM10 EB 8 -
232 Property for Byte 202 - COM15 COM10 EB 8 -
233 Property for Byte 203 - BSS COM10 EB 8 -
234 Property for Byte 204 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
235 Property for Byte 206 - ETU - EB 8 -
236 Property for Byte 208 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
237 Property for Byte 210 - ETU - EB 8 -
Der ösatz 51 kopiert die wichtigsten Informationen aus anderen ösätzen und stellt diese als Komplettübersicht zur Verfügung.
Tabelle
Dieser ösatz wird in Switch ES Power benutzt, um die ö der Hauptübersicht anzuzeigen.
7-18

7-17

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 DS64: Harmonic analysis (Length 131 Byte, read only)
Byte Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale
point (Bit)
0 Harmonische von Strom/Spannung bis zur 29. 309 Metering - Format (309) 928 0
116 Reserved - - - - 112 -
130 Property for Byte 0 - Metering - EB 8 -
Im ösatz 64 werden die Anteile der Harmonischen von Strom und Spannung übertragen. Der Inhalt ist im Format (309) beschrie-
Tabelle
ben. Das Eigenschaftsbyte erteilt Auskunft, ob der Data point verfügbar ist. Generell ist eine Harmonische Analyse nur mit einem
7-19
SENTRON WL mit Messfunktion Plus verfügbar.

DS68: Data points of the c Modules (Length 45 Byte, lesend und schreibend)
Byte Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale
point (Bit)
0 Header; Val. 0x00 00 00 00 - COM15 COM10 - 32 -
4 System-Time der Leistungsschalter 90 COM15 COM10 Time 64 -
12 Steuert die Ausgänge des Kommunikationsmoduls 19 COM15 COM10 Format (19) 8 -
(z.B. Schalten des Schalters)
13 Reserved - - - - 8 -
14 Status der Ausgänge des dig. Ausgangsmoduls 1 118 DO1 - Hex 8 -
15 Status der Ausgänge des dig. Ausgangsmoduls 2 123 DO2 - Hex 8 -
16 Reserved - - - - 192 -
40 Property for Byte 4 - COM15 - EB 8 -
41 Property for Byte 12 - COM15 - EB 8 -
42 Reserved - - - - 8 -
43 Property for Byte 14 - DO1 - EB 8 -
44 Property for Byte 15 - DO2 - EB 8 -
Über den DS68 können die Ausgönge der dig. Ausgangsmodule gelesen und auch gesteuert werden sowie die SystemTime ausge-
Tabelle
lesen werden. Es ist darüber auch möglich, die SystemTime einzustellen und auch die Ausgänge der PROFIBUS Schnittstellen zu
7-20
setzen, um die Schalter ein- bzw. auszuschalten.

7-18

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 DS69: Status of the Modules (Length 43 Byte, read only)
Byte Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale
point (Bit)
0 Status der Eingänge des dig. Eingangsmoduls 1 110 DI1 - Hex 8 -
1 Status der Eingänge des dig. Eingangsmoduls 2 114 DI2 - Hex 8 -
2 Steuert die Ausgänge des Kommunikationsmoduls 19 COM15 COM10 Format (19) 8
(z.B. Schalten des Schalters) inkl. Rückmeldungen
3 Schalterstellung am digitalen Eingangsmodul 1 111 DI1 - Format (111) 8 -
4 Schalterstellung am digitalen Eingangsmodul 2 115 DI2 - Format (111) 8 -
5 Schalterstellung am digitalen Ausgangsmodul 1 119 DO1 - Format (119) 8 -
6 Schalterstellung am digitalen Ausgangsmodul 2 124 DO2 - Format (119) 8 -
7 Reserved - - - - 32 -
11 PROFIBUS Schreibschutz (DPWriteEnable) 14 COM15 COM10 Format (14) 1 -
12 Reserved - - - - 8 -
13 6 PROFIBUS Bits für das digitale konfigurierbare Aus- 426 COM15 - Format (426) 6 -
gangsmodul
14 Reserved - - - - 120 -
29 Property for Byte 13 - COM15 - EB 8 -
30 Property for Byte 0 - DI1 - EB 8 -
31 Property for Byte 1 - DI2 - EB 8 -
32 Property for Byte 2 - COM15 COM10 EB 8 -
33 Property for Byte 3 - DI1 - EB 8 -
34 Property for Byte 4 - DI2 - EB 8 -
35 Property for Byte 5 - DO1 - EB 8 -
36 Property for Byte 6 - DO2 - EB 8 -
37 Reserved - - - - 32 -
41 Property for Byte 11 - COM15 COM10 EB 8 -
42 Reserved - - - - 8 -
Im DS69 werden die Zustände der Eingänge an den digitalen Eingangsmodulen sowie des Eingangs am COM15 Modul übertra-
Tabelle
gen. content sind auch die Schalterstellungen an den digitalen Ein- und Ausgangsmodulen am c
7-21

7-19

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 DS72: Min./Max. values of the currents and the corresponding time stamps (Length 236 Byte, read only) part 1
Byte Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale
point (Bit)
0 Minimaler Strom in der Phase 1 384 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0
2 Maximaler Strom in der Phase 1 385 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0
4 Minimaler Strom in der Phase 2 386 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0
6 Maximaler Strom in der Phase 2 387 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0
8 Minimaler Strom in der Phase 3 388 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0
10 Maximaler Strom in der Phase 3 389 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0
12 Minimaler Strom im Neutralleiter 390 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0
14 Maximaler Strom im Neutralleiter 391 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0
16 Minimaler Strom, der zur Erde abfließt 392 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0
18 Maximaler Strom, der zur Erde abfließt 393 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0
20 Minimaler MittelVal. über die drei Phasen 394 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0
22 Maximaler MittelVal. über die drei Phasen 395 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0
24 Minimum LangTimemittelVal. Strom 244 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
26 Maximum LangTimemittelVal. Strom 245 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
28 Minimum des Scheitelfaktors 263 Metering - unsigned char 8 -1
29 Maximum des Scheitelfaktors 264 Metering - unsigned char 8 -1
30 Minimum des Formfaktors 265 Metering - unsigned char 8 -1
31 Maximum des Formfaktors 266 Metering - unsigned char 8 -1
32 TS Minimaler Strom in der Phase 1 25 COM15 COM10 Time 64 -
40 TS Maximaler Strom in der Phase 1 26 COM15 COM10 Time 64 -
48 TS Minimaler Strom in der Phase 2 27 COM15 COM10 Time 64 -
56 TS Maximaler Strom in der Phase 2 28 COM15 COM10 Time 64 -
64 TS Minimaler Strom in der Phase 3 29 COM15 COM10 Time 64 -
72 TS Maximaler Strom in der Phase 3 30 COM15 COM10 Time 64 -
80 TS Minimaler MittelVal. über die drei Phasen 31 COM15 COM10 Time 64 -
88 TS Maximaler MittelVal. über die drei Phasen 32 COM15 COM10 Time 64 -
96 TS Minimum LangTimemittelVal. Strom 55 COM15 - Time 64 -
104 TS Maximum LangTimemittelVal. Strom 56 COM15 - Time 64 -
112 TS Minimaler Strom im Neutralleiter 33 COM15 COM10 Time 64 -
120 TS Maximaler Strom im Neutralleiter 34 COM15 COM10 Time 64 -
128 TS Minimaler Strom, der zur Erde abfließt 35 COM15 COM10 Time 64 -
136 TS Maximaler Strom, der zur Erde abfließt 36 COM15 COM10 Time 64 -
144 TS Minimum des Scheitelfaktors 65 COM15 - Time 64 -
152 TS Maximum des Scheitelfaktors 66 COM15 - Time 64 -
160 TS Minimum des Formfaktors 67 COM15 - Time 64 -
168 TS Maximum des Formfaktors 68 COM15 - Time 64 -
176 Reserved - - - - 192 -
200 Property for Byte 0 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
201 Property for Byte 2 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
Im ösatz 72 werden die minimalen und maximalen Messwerte der Ströme übertragen. content sind ebenfalls die dazugehörenden
Tabelle
Timestempel für diese minimalen und maximalen Messwerte. Teil 1
7-22

7-20

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 DS72: Min./Max. values of the currents and the corresponding time stamps (Length 236 Byte, read only) part 2
Byte Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale
point (Bit)
202 Property for Byte 4 386 ETU ETU EB 8 -
203 Property for Byte 6 387 ETU ETU EB 8 -
204 Property for Byte 8 388 ETU ETU EB 8 -
205 Property for Byte 10 389 ETU ETU EB 8 -
206 Property for Byte 12 390 ETU ETU EB 8 -
207 Property for Byte 14 391 ETU ETU EB 8 -
208 Property for Byte 16 392 ETU ETU EB 8 -
209 Property for Byte 18 393 ETU ETU EB 8 -
210 Property for Byte 20 394 ETU ETU EB 8 -
211 Property for Byte 22 395 ETU ETU EB 8 -
212 Property for Byte 24 244 Metering - EB 8 -
213 Property for Byte 26 245 Metering - EB 8 -
214 Property for Byte 28 263 Metering - EB 8 -
215 Property for Byte 29 264 Metering - EB 8 -
216 Property for Byte 30 265 Metering - EB 8 -
217 Property for Byte 31 266 Metering - EB 8 -
218 Property for Byte32 25 COM15 COM10 EB 8 -
219 Property for Byte 40 26 COM15 COM10 EB 8 -
220 Property for Byte 48 27 COM15 COM10 EB 8 -
221 Property for Byte 56 28 COM15 COM10 EB 8 -
222 Property for Byte 64 29 COM15 COM10 EB 8 -
223 Property for Byte 72 30 COM15 COM10 EB 8 -
224 Property for Byte 80 31 COM15 COM10 EB 8 -
225 Property for Byte 88 32 COM15 COM10 EB 8 -
226 Property for Byte 96 55 COM15 - EB 8 -
227 Property for Byte 104 56 COM15 - EB 8 -
228 Property for Byte 112 33 COM15 COM10 EB 8 -
229 Property for Byte 120 34 COM15 COM10 EB 8 -
230 Property for Byte 128 35 COM15 COM10 EB 8 -
231 Property for Byte 136 36 COM15 COM10 EB 8 -
232 Property for Byte 144 65 COM15 - EB 8 -
233 Property for Byte 152 66 COM15 - EB 8 -
234 Property for Byte 160 67 COM15 - EB 8 -
235 Property for Byte 168 68 COM15 - EB 8 -
Im ösatz 72 werden die minimalen und maximalen Messwerte der Ströme übertragen. content sind ebenfalls die dazugehörenden
Tabelle
Timestempel für diese minimalen und maximalen Messwerte. Teil 2
7-23

7-21

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 DS73: Min./Max. values of the voltages and the corresponding time stamps (Length 174 Byte, read only) part 1
Byte Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale
point (Bit)
0 Minimum der verketteten Spannung zwischen Phase 205 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
L1 und Phase L2
2 Maximum der verketteten Spannung zwischen Phase 206 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
L1 und Phase L2
4 Minimum der verketteten Spannung zwischen Phase 207 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
L2 und Phase L3
6 Maximum der verketteten Spannung zwischen Phase 208 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
L2 und Phase L3
8 Minimum der verketteten Spannung zwischen Phase 209 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
L3 und Phase L1
10 Maximum der verketteten Spannung zwischen Phase 210 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
L3 und Phase L1
12 Minimum der Sternätspannung Phase L1 211 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
14 Maximum der Sternätspannung Phase L1 212 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
16 Minimum der Sternätspannung Phase L2 213 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
18 Maximum der Sternätspannung Phase L2 214 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
20 Minimum der Sternätspannung Phase L3 215 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
22 Maximum der Sternätspannung Phase L3 216 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
24 TS Minimum der verketteten Spannung zwischen 37 COM15 - Time 64 -
Phase L1 und Phase L2
32 TS Maximum der verketteten Spannung zwischen 38 COM15 - Time 64 -
Phase L1 und Phase L2
40 TS Minimum der verketteten Spannung zwischen 39 COM15 - Time 64 -
Phase L2 und Phase L3
48 TS Maximum der verketteten Spannung zwischen 40 COM15 - Time 64 -
Phase L2 und Phase L3
56 TS Minimum der verketteten Spannung zwischen 41 COM15 - Time 64 -
Phase L3 und Phase L1
64 TS Maximum der verketteten Spannung zwischen 42 COM15 - Time 64 -
Phase L3 und Phase L1
72 TS Minimum der Sternätspannung Phase L1 43 COM15 - Time 64 -
80 TS Maximum der Sternätspannung Phase L1 44 COM15 - Time 64 -
88 TS Minimum der Sternätspannung Phase L2 45 COM15 - Time 64 -
96 TS Maximum der Sternätspannung Phase L2 46 COM15 - Time 64 -
104 TS Minimum der Sternätspannung Phase L3 47 COM15 - Time 64 -
112 TS Maximum der Sternätspannung Phase L3 48 COM15 - Time 64 -
120 Reserved - - - - 240 -
150 Property for Byte 0 - Metering - EB 8 -
151 Property for Byte 2 - Metering - EB 8 -
152 Property for Byte 4 - Metering - EB 8 -
153 Property for Byte 6 - Metering - EB 8 -
154 Property for Byte 8 - Metering - EB 8 -
155 Property for Byte 10 - Metering - EB 8 -
Im ösatz 73 werden die minimalen und maximalen Messwerte der Spannungen übertragen. content sind ebenfalls die dazugehö-
Tabelle
renden Timestempel für diese minimalen und maximalen Messwerte. Teil 1
7-24

7-22

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 DS73: Min./Max. values of the voltages and the corresponding time stamps (Length 174 Byte, read only) part 2
Byte Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale
point (Bit)
156 Property for Byte 12 - Metering - EB 8 -
157 Property for Byte 14 - Metering - EB 8 -
158 Property for Byte 16 - Metering - EB 8 -
159 Property for Byte 18 - Metering - EB 8 -
160 Property for Byte 20 - Metering - EB 8 -
161 Property for Byte 22 - Metering - EB 8 -
162 Property for Byte 24 - COM15 - EB 8 -
163 Property for Byte 32 - COM15 - EB 8 -
164 Property for Byte 40 - COM15 - EB 8 -
165 Property for Byte 48 - COM15 - EB 8 -
166 Property for Byte 56 - COM15 - EB 8 -
167 Property for Byte 64 - COM15 - EB 8 -
168 Property for Byte 72 - COM15 - EB 8 -
169 Property for Byte 80 - COM15 - EB 8 -
170 Property for Byte 88 - COM15 - EB 8 -
171 Property for Byte 96 - COM15 - EB 8 -
172 Property for Byte 104 - COM15 - EB 8 -
173 Property for Byte 112 - COM15 - EB 8 -
Im ösatz 73 werden die minimalen und maximalen Messwerte der Spannungen übertragen. content sind ebenfalls die dazugehö-
Tabelle
renden Timestempel für diese minimalen und maximalen Messwerte. Teil 2
7-25

DS74: Min./Max. values of the power and the corresponding time stamps (Length 136 Byte, read only) part 1
Byte Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale
point (Bit)
0 Minimum des MittelVal.s des Leistungsfaktors 242 Metering - signed int 16 -3
2 Maximum des MittelVal.s des Leistungsfaktors 243 Metering - signed int 16 -3
4 Minimum des MittelVal.es der Scheinleistung 246 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
6 Maximum des MittelVal.es Scheinleistung 247 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
8 Minimum des MittelVal.es der Wirkleistung 250 Metering - signed int 16 0
10 Maximum des MittelVal.es der Wirkleistung 251 Metering - signed int 16 0
12 Minimum des MittelVal.es der Blindleistung 248 Metering - signed int 16 0
14 Maximum des MittelVal.es der Blindeistung 249 Metering - signed int 16 0
16 TS Minimum d. MittelVal.es der Scheinleistung 57 COM15 - Time 64 -
24 TS Maximum des MittelVal.es Scheinleistung 58 COM15 - Time 64 -
32 TS Minimum des MittelVal.es der Wirkleistung 49 COM15 - Time 64 -
40 TS Maximum des MittelVal.es der Wirkleistung 50 COM15 - Time 64 -
48 TS Minimum des MittelVal.es der Blindleistung 51 COM15 - Time 64 -
56 TS Maximum des MittelVal.es der Blindeistung 52 COM15 - Time 64 -
64 TS Min. des MittelVal.s des Leistungsfaktors 53 COM15 - Time 64 -
Im ösatz 74 werden die minimalen und maximalen Messwerte der Leistungen übertragen. content sind ebenfalls die dazugehö-
Tabelle
renden Timestempel für diese minimalen und maximalen Messwerte. Teil 1
7-26

7-23

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 DS74: Min./Max. values of the power and the corresponding time stamps (Length 136 Byte, read only) part 2
Byte Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale
point (Bit)
72 TS Max. des MittelVal.s des Leistungsfaktors 54 COM15 - Time 64 -
80 Reserved - - - - 320 -
120 Property for Byte 0 Metering - EB 8 -
121 Property for Byte 2 Metering - EB 8 -
122 Property for Byte 4 Metering - EB 8 -
123 Property for Byte 6 Metering - EB 8 -
124 Property for Byte 8 Metering - EB 8 -
125 Property for Byte 10 Metering - EB 8 -
126 Property for Byte 12 Metering - EB 8 -
127 Property for Byte 14 Metering - EB 8 -
128 Property for Byte 16 COM15 - EB 8 -
129 Property for Byte 24 COM15 - EB 8 -
130 Property for Byte 32 COM15 - EB 8 -
131 Property for Byte 40 COM15 - EB 8 -
132 Property for Byte 48 COM15 - EB 8 -
133 Property for Byte 56 COM15 - EB 8 -
134 Property for Byte 64 COM15 - EB 8 -
135 Property for Byte 72 COM15 - EB 8 -
Im ösatz 74 werden die minimalen und maximalen Messwerte der Leistungen übertragen. content sind ebenfalls die dazugehö-
Tabelle
renden Timestempel für diese minimalen und maximalen Messwerte. Teil 2
7-27

7-24

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 DS76: Min./Max. values of the frequency/distortion and the corresponding time stamps (Length 92 Byte, read only)
Byte Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale
point (Bit)
0 Maximum der Frequenz 253 Metering COM10 unsigned int 16 -2
2 Minimum der Frequenz 252 Metering COM10 unsigned int 16 -2
4 Minimum des Klirrfaktors des Stromes 255 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
5 Maximum des Klirrfaktors des Stromes 256 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
6 Minimum des Klirrfaktors der Spannung 258 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
7 Maximum des Klirrfaktors der Spannung 259 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
8 TS Minimum der Frequenz 59 COM15 - Time 64 -
16 TS Maximum der Frequenz 60 COM15 - Time 64 -
24 TS Minimum des Klirrfaktors des Stromes 61 COM15 - Time 64 -
32 TS Maximum des Klirrfaktors des Stromes 62 COM15 - Time 64 -
40 TS Minimum des Klirrfaktors der Spannung 63 COM15 - Time 64 -
48 TS Maximum des Klirrfaktors der Spannung 64 COM15 - Time 64 -
56 Reserved - - - - 192 -
80 Property for Byte 0 Metering COM10 EB 8 -
81 Property for Byte 2 Metering COM10 EB 8 -
82 Property for Byte 4 Metering - EB 8 -
83 Property for Byte 5 Metering - EB 8 -
84 Property for Byte 6 Metering - EB 8 -
85 Property for Byte 7 Metering - EB 8 -
86 Property for Byte 8 COM15 - EB 8 -
87 Property for Byte 16 COM15 - EB 8 -
88 Property for Byte 24 COM15 - EB 8 -
89 Property for Byte 32 COM15 - EB 8 -
90 Property for Byte 40 COM15 - EB 8 -
91 Property for Byte 48 COM15 - EB 8 -
Im ösatz 76 werden die minimalen und maximalen Messwerte der Frequenz und der Klirrfaktoren übertragen. content sind eben-
Tabelle
falls die dazugehörenden Timestempel für diese minimalen und maximalen Messwerte.
7-28

7-25

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 DS77: Min./Max. values of the temperatures and the corresponding time stamps (Length 58 Byte, read only)
Byte Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale
point (Bit)
0 Minimale Temperatur im Schaltschrank 72 COM15 - unsigned char 8 0
1 Maximale Temperatur im Schaltschrank 73 COM15 - unsigned char 8 0
2 Minimale Temperatur im Leistungsschalter 74 BSS - unsigned char 8 0
3 Maximale Temperatur im Leistungsschalter 75 BSS - unsigned char 8 0
4 TS Minimale Temperatur im Schaltschrank 76 COM15 - Time 64 -
12 TS Maximale Temperatur im Schaltschrank 77 COM15 - Time 64 -
20 TS Minimale Temperatur im Leistungsschalter 78 COM15 - Time 64 -
28 TS Maximale Temperatur im Leistungsschalter 79 COM15 - Time 64 -
36 Reserved - - - - 112 -
50 Property for Byte 0 COM15 -
51 Property for Byte 1 COM15 - EB 8 -
52 Property for Byte 2 BSS - EB 8 -
53 Property for Byte 3 BSS - EB 8 -
54 Property for Byte 4 COM15 - EB 8 -
55 Property for Byte 12 COM15 - EB 8 -
56 Property for Byte 20 COM15 - EB 8 -
57 Property for Byte 28 COM15 - EB 8 -
Im ösatz 77 werden die minimalen und maximalen Messwerte der Temperaturen übertragen. content sind ebenfalls die dazuge-
Tabelle
hörenden Timestempel für diese minimalen und maximalen Messwerte.
7-29

7-26

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 DS91: Informations for statistic and maintenance (Length 84 Byte, read only)
Byte Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale
point (Bit)
0 Anzahl der Schaltungen unter Last 80 COM15 COM10 unsigned int 16 0
2 Anzahl der Schaltungen durch Auslöungen 81 COM15 COM10 unsigned int 16 0
4 Schaltspielzähler (für Schaltzyklus ein/aus) 82 COM15 - unsigned int 16 0
6 Betriebsstundenzähler (bei Ein + Strom > 0) 83 COM15 - unsigned long 32 0
10 Datum der letzten Parameteränderung 84 COM15 - Time 64 -
18 Anzahl Kurzschlußauslösungen (SI) 104 ETU COM10 unsigned int 16 0
20 Anzahl Überlastauslösungen (L) 105 ETU COM10 unsigned int 16 0
22 Anzahl Erdschlußauslösungen (G) 106 ETU COM10 unsigned int 16 0
24 Summe der abgeschalt. I²t-Val.e L1, L2, L3, N 107 ETU COM10 Format (107) 128 0
40 Wartungsinformation zu den Hauptkontakten 405 ETU - Format (405) 2 -
41 Reserved - - - - 56 -
48 Module, die am c angeschl. sind 88 COM15 - Format (88) 32 -
52 Reserved - - - - 144 -
70 Property for Byte 0 - COM15 COM10 EB 8 -
71 Property for Byte 2 - COM15 COM10 EB 8 -
72 Property for Byte 4 - COM15 - EB 8 -
73 Property for Byte 6 - COM15 - EB 8 -
74 Property for Byte 10 - COM15 - EB 8 -
75 Property for Byte 18 - ETU COM10 EB 8 -
76 Property for Byte 20 - ETU COM10 EB 8 -
77 Property for Byte 22 - ETU COM10 EB 8 -
78 Property for Byte 24 - ETU COM10 EB 8 -
79 Property for Byte 40 - ETU - EB 8 -
80 Reserved - - - - 32 -
Im ösatz 91 werden statistische Informationen zu den SENTRON Leistungsschaltern übertragen. Wie auch bei den anderen ösät-
Tabelle
zen wird in den Eigenschaftsbytes die Eigenschaft jedes Datenpunktes zusätzlich übertragen.
7-30

7-27

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 DS92: Diagnostic (Length 194 Byte, read only)
Byte Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale
point (Bit)
0 Gerätestatus 1 (identisch Normdiagnose) - COM15 COM15 DP Norm 8 -
1 Gerätestatus 2 (identisch Normdiagnose) - COM15 COM15 DP Norm 8 -
2 Gerätestatus 3 (identisch Normdiagnose) - COM15 COM15 DP Norm 8 -
3 Adresse des Master Klasse 1 - COM15 COM10 unsigned char 8 0
4 Identnummer SENTRON (0x80C0) - COM15 COM10 hex 16 -
6 Fester Val. 0x42 - COM15 COM10 hex 8 -
7 Externes Diagnosebit; 1=Diagnose; 0=keine Diagn. - COM15 COM10 hex 1 -
8 Fester Header; Val. 0x05 82 00 00 00 - COM15 COM10 hex 40 -
13 Reserved - - - - 8 -
14 Diagnosemeldungen - COM15 COM10 Diagnose 16 -
16 Von der Diagnose betroffenes Modul - COM15 COM10 siehe Kap. 4 32 -
20 Module, die am c angeschl. sind 88 COM15 - siehe Kap. 4 32 -
24 Aktuell anliegende Warnungen 402 ETU ETU Format (402) 16 -
26 Letzte, nicht quittierte Auslösung des Auslöser 401 ETU ETU Format (401) 8 -
27 Reserved - - - - 8 -
28 Auslösungen durch die Messfunktion/M. Plus 307 Metering - Format (307) 16 -
30 SchwellVal.warnungen 308 Metering - Format (308) 32 -
34 Strom im Abschaltmoment 403 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0(VL)/ 1
36 Phase im Abschaltmoment 404 ETU ETU Format (373) 3 -
37 Position des Leistungsschalter im Rahmen 24 COM15 COM10 Format (24) 4 -
38 Reserved - - - - 16 -
40 Status Leistungsschalter (Ein/Aus/Gespannt etc.) 328 BSS COM10 Format (328) 8 -
41 Reserved - - - - 8 -
42 Ereignisbuch der letzten 10 Ereignisse mit Time 16 COM15 COM10 Format (16) 960 -
162 Reserved - - - - 144 -
180 Property for Byte 20 - COM15 - EB 8 -
181 Property for Byte 24 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
182 Property for Byte 26 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
183 Property for Byte 28 - Metering - EB 8 -
184 Property for Byte 30 - Metering - EB 8 -
185 Property for Byte 34 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
186 Property for Byte 36 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
187 Property for Byte 37 - COM15 COM10 EB 8 -
188 Reserved - - - - 8 -
189 Property for Byte 40 - BSS COM10 EB 8 -
190 Property for Byte 42 - COM15 COM10 EB 8 -
191 Reserved - - - - 24 -
Über den ösatz 92 werden die ö zur detaillierten Diagnose der SENTRON Leistungsschalter übertragen.
Tabelle
7-31

7-28

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 DS93: Control the circuit breaker (Length 27 Byte, write only)
Byte Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale
point (Bit)
0 Header; Val. 0x00 00 00 00 - COM15 COM10 - 32 -
4 Steuert den Auslöser 406 ETU - Format (406) 16 -
6 Reserved - - - - 16 -
8 Steuert das digitale Ausgangsmodul 1 121 DO1 - Format (121) 8 -
9 Steuert das digitale Ausgangsmodul 2 126 DO2 - Format (121) 8 -
10 Steuert die Speicher (z.B. min/max Val.e) des Kom- 18 COM15 COM10 Format (18) 8 -
munikationsmoduls
11 Steuert die Ausgänge des Kommunikationsmoduls 19 COM15 COM10 Format (19) 8 -
(z.B. Schalten des Schalters)
12 Reserved - - - - 8 -
13 6 PROFIBUS Bits für das digitale konfigurierbare Aus- 426 COM15 - Format (426) 6 -
gangsmodul
14 Reserved - - - - 40 -
19 Property for Byte 13 - COM15 - EB 8 -
20 Property for Byte 4 - ETU - EB 8 -
21 Property for Byte 6 - Metering - EB 8 -
22 Property for Byte 8 - DO1 - EB 8 -
23 Property for Byte 9 - DO2 - EB 8 -
24 Property for Byte 10 - COM15 COM10 EB 8 -
25 Property for Byte 11 - COM15 COM10 EB 8 -
26 Reserved - - - - 8 -
Über den DS93 können die SENTRON Leistungsschalter eingeschaltet, die min./max. Speicher gelöscht, die Ausgänge der digita-
Tabelle
len Ausgangsmodule geforced und die 6 zur Verfügung stehenden PROFIBUS Bits (können über das konf. dig. Ausgangsmodul
7-32
ausgegeben werden) gesetzt werden.

7-29

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 DS94: Current metering values (Length 197 Byte, read only) part 1
Byte Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale
point (Bit)
0 Phasenunsymmetrie Strom (in %) 172 Metering ETU unsigned char 8 0
1 Reserved - - - - 8 -
2 LangTimemittelVal. Strom 3-phasig 193 Metering ETU unsigned int 16 0
4 LangTimemittelVal. Strom L1 194 Metering ETU unsigned int 16 0
6 LangTimemittelVal. Strom L2 195 Metering ETU unsigned int 16 0
8 LangTimemittelVal. Strom L3 196 Metering ETU unsigned int 16 0
10 Strom in der Phase 1 380 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0
12 Strom in der Phase 2 381 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0
14 Strom in der Phase 3 382 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0
16 MittelVal. Strom über die drei Phasen 383 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0
18 Strom im Neutralleiter 375 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0
20 Strom, der zur Erde abfließt 376 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0
22 Phasenunsymmetrie Spannung (in %) 173 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
23 Reserved - - - - 8 -
24 Verkettete Spannung zwischen Phase L1 und L2 197 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
26 Verkettete Spannung zwischen Phase L2 und L3 198 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
28 Verkettete Spannung zwischen Phase L3 und L1 199 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
30 Sternätspannung Phase L1 200 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
32 Sternätspannung Phase L2 201 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
34 Sternätspannung Phase L3 202 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
36 MittelVal. der verketteten Spannung 203 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
38 MittelVal. der Sternätspannung 204 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
40 Summe der Scheinleistungen 217 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
42 Summe der Wirkleistungen 221 Metering - signed int 16 0
44 Wirkleistung in der Phase L1 222 Metering - signed int 16 0
46 Wirkleistung in der Phase L2 223 Metering - signed int 16 0
48 Wirkleistung in der Phase L3 224 Metering - signed int 16 0
50 Summe der Blindleistungen 225 Metering - signed int 16 0
52 LangTimemittelVal. der Wirkleistung 3-phasig 229 Metering - signed int 16 0
54 LangTimemittelVal. der Wirkleistung in der PhaseL1 230 Metering - signed int 16 0
56 LangTimemittelVal. der Wirkleistung in der Phase L2 231 Metering - signed int 16 0
58 LangTimemittelVal. der Wirkleistung in der Phase L3 232 Metering - signed int 16 0
60 LangTimemittelVal. der Scheinleistung 3-phasig 233 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
62 Scheinleistung in der Phase L1 218 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
64 Scheinleistung in der Phase L2 219 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
66 Scheinleistung in der Phase L3 220 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
68 LangTimemittelVal. der Scheinleistung i. d. Phase L1 234 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
70 LangTimemittelVal. der Scheinleistung i. d. Phase L2 235 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
72 LangTimemittelVal. der Scheinleistung i. d. Phase L3 236 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
Im ösatz 94 werden alle aktuellen Messwerte übertragen. Die zusätzlichen Eigenschaftsbytes erteilen Auskunft über die Verfüg-
Tabelle
barkeit und Korrektheit der Messwerte. Teil 1
7-33

7-30

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 DS94: Current metering values (Length 197 Byte, read only) part 2
Byte Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale
point (Bit)
74 LangTimemittelVal. der Blindleistung 3-phasig 237 Metering - signed int 16 0
76 Blindleistung in der Phase L1 226 Metering - signed int 16 0
78 Blindleistung in der Phase L2 227 Metering - signed int 16 0
80 Blindleistung in der Phase L3 228 Metering - signed int 16 0
82 Wirkarbeit in Normalrichtung 238 Metering - unsigned long 32 0
86 Wirkarbeit gegen die Normalrichtung 239 Metering - unsigned long 32 0
90 Blindarbeit in Normalrichtung 240 Metering - unsigned long 32 0
94 Blindarbeit gegen die Normalrichtung 241 Metering - unsigned long 32 0
98 MittelVal. des Leistungsfaktors 168 Metering - signed int 16 -3
100 Leistungsfaktor in der Phase L1 169 Metering - signed int 16 -3
102 Leistungsfaktor in der Phase L2 170 Metering - signed int 16 -3
104 Leistungsfaktor in der Phase L3 171 Metering - signed int 16 -3
106 Frequenz 262 Metering COM10 unsigned int 16 -2
108 Klirrfaktor des Stromes 254 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
109 Klirrfaktor der Spannung 257 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
110 Formfaktor 261 Metering - unsigned char 8 -1
111 Scheitelfaktor 260 Metering - unsigned char 8 -1
112 Reserved - - - - 16 -
114 Temperatur im Schaltschrank (gem. im COM15) 71 COM15 - unsigned char 8 0
115 Temperatur im Leistungsschalter (gem. im BSS) 330 BSS - unsigned char 8 0
116 Reserved - - - - 192 -
140 Property for Byte 0 - Metering ETU EB 8 -
141 Property for Byte 2 - Metering ETU EB 8 -
142 Property for Byte 4 - Metering ETU EB 8 -
143 Property for Byte 6 - Metering ETU EB 8 -
144 Property for Byte 8 - Metering ETU EB 8 -
145 Property for Byte 10 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
146 Property for Byte 12 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
147 Property for Byte 14 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
148 Property for Byte 16 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
149 Property for Byte 18 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
150 Property for Byte 20 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
151 Property for Byte 22 - Metering - EB 8 -
152 Property for Byte 24 - Metering - EB 8 -
153 Property for Byte 26 - Metering - EB 8 -
154 Property for Byte 28 - Metering - EB 8 -
155 Property for Byte 30 - Metering - EB 8 -
156 Property for Byte 32 - Metering - EB 8 -
157 Property for Byte 34 - Metering - EB 8 -
Im ösatz 94 werden alle aktuellen Messwerte übertragen. Die zusätzlichen Eigenschaftsbytes erteilen Auskunft über die Verfüg-
Tabelle
barkeit und Korrektheit der Messwerte. Teil 2
7-34

7-31

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 DS94: Current metering values (Length 197 Byte, read only) part 3
Byte Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale
point (Bit)
158 Property for Byte 36 - Metering - EB 8 -
159 Property for Byte 38 - Metering - EB 8 -
160 Property for Byte 40 - Metering - EB 8 -
161 Property for Byte 42 - Metering - EB 8 -
162 Property for Byte 44 - Metering - EB 8 -
163 Property for Byte 46 - Metering - EB 8 -
164 Property for Byte 48 - Metering - EB 8 -
165 Property for Byte 50 - Metering - EB 8 -
166 Property for Byte 52 - Metering - EB 8 -
167 Property for Byte 54 - Metering - EB 8 -
168 Property for Byte 56 - Metering - EB 8 -
169 Property for Byte 58 - Metering - EB 8 -
170 Property for Byte 60 - Metering - EB 8 -
171 Property for Byte 62 - Metering - EB 8 -
172 Property for Byte 64 - Metering - EB 8 -
173 Property for Byte 66 - Metering - EB 8 -
174 Property for Byte 68 - Metering - EB 8 -
175 Property for Byte 70 - Metering - EB 8 -
176 Property for Byte 72 - Metering - EB 8 -
177 Property for Byte 74 - Metering - EB 8 -
178 Property for Byte 76 - Metering - EB 8 -
179 Property for Byte 78 - Metering - EB 8 -
180 Property for Byte 80 - Metering - EB 8 -
181 Property for Byte 82 - Metering - EB 8 -
182 Property for Byte 86 - Metering - EB 8 -
183 Property for Byte 90 - Metering - EB 8 -
184 Property for Byte 94 - Metering - EB 8 -
185 Property for Byte 98 - Metering - EB 8 -
186 Property for Byte 100 - Metering - EB 8 -
187 Property for Byte 102 - Metering - EB 8 -
188 Property for Byte 104 - Metering - EB 8 -
189 Property for Byte 106 - Metering COM10 EB 8 -
190 Property for Byte 108 - Metering - EB 8 -
191 Property for Byte 109 - Metering - EB 8 -
192 Property for Byte 110 - Metering - EB 8 -
193 Property for Byte 111 - Metering - EB 8 -
194 Reserved - - - - 8 -
195 Property for Byte 114 - COM15 - EB 8 -
196 Property for Byte 115 - BSS - EB 8 -
Im ösatz 94 werden alle aktuellen Messwerte übertragen. Die zusätzlichen Eigenschaftsbytes erteilen Auskunft über die Verfüg-
Tabelle
barkeit und Korrektheit der Messwerte. Teil 3
7-35

7-32

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 DS97: Identification detail (Length 223 Byte, read only) part 1
Byte Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale
point (Bit)
0 Bestellnummer des Auslöser 407 ETU ETU 16 x char 144 -
18 Herstellungsdatum des Auslöser 408 ETU - Time 64 -
26 Identnummer des Auslösers 409 ETU ETU 17 x char 136 -
43 Reserved - - - - 8 -
44 Erdschluß Wandlererfassungsart 410 ETU ETU Format (410) 2 -
45 N-Wandler angeschlossen 411 ETU ETU Format (411) 1 -
46 Reserved - - - - 8 -
47 Markt, in dem der Auslöser eingesetzt wird 95 ETU - Format (95) 2 -
48 Identnummer des Leistungsschalters 96 ETU - 20 x char 160 -
68 Reserved - - - - 48 -
74 Prüfdatum Schalter 98 ETU - Time 64 -
82 Schaltleistungsklasse 99 ETU - Format (99) 4 -
83 Baugröße 100 ETU Format (100) 2 -
84 Nennspannung (LL) des Leistungsschalters 101 ETU - unsigned int 16 0
86 Bemessungsstrom des externen g-Wandlers 102 ETU - unsigned int 16 0
88 Bestellnummer Leistungsschalter (Auslöser VL) 103 ETU ETU Format (103) 160 -
108 Reserved - - - - 144 -
126 Bestellnummer des Auslösers 371 ETU - 18 x char 144 -
144 Polzahl des Leistungsschalters 108 ETU ETU Format (108) 3 -
145 Reserved - - - - 8 -
146 Bemessungsstromstecker (Rating Plug) 377 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0
148 Leistungsschalter Rahmen (Frame) 378 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0
150 Reserved - - - - 32 -
154 Bestellnummer COM10 424 - COM10 16 x char 128 -
170 Seriennummer COM10 425 - COM10 16 x char 128 -
186 Reserved - - - - 112 -
200 Property for Byte 0 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
201 Property for Byte 16 - ETU - EB 8 -
202 Property for Byte 28 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
203 Property for Byte 44 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
204 Property for Byte 45 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
205 Reserved - - - - 8 -
206 Property for Byte 47 - ETU - EB 8 -
207 Property for Byte 48 - ETU - EB 8 -
208 Reserved - - - - 8 -
209 Property for Byte 74 - ETU - EB 8 -
210 Property for Byte 82 - ETU - EB 8 -
211 Property for Byte 83 - ETU EB 8 -
212 Property for Byte 84 - ETU - EB 8 -
Über den ösatz 97 erhält der User alle notwendigen Informationen zur genauen Identifikation der SENTRON Leistungsschalter.
Tabelle
Teil 1
7-36

7-33

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 DS97: Identification detail (Length 223 Byte, read only) part 2
Byte Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale
point (Bit)
213 Property for Byte 86 - ETU - EB 8 -
214 Property for Byte 88 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
215 Reserved - - - - 8 -
216 Property for Byte 126 - ETU - EB 8 -
217 Property for Byte 144 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
218 Property for Byte 146 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
219 Property for Byte 148 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
220 Reserved - - - - 8 -
221 Property for Byte 154 - - COM10 EB 8 -
222 Property for Byte 170 - - COM10 EB 8 -
Über den ösatz 97 erhält der User alle notwendigen Informationen zur genauen Identifikation der SENTRON Leistungsschalter.
Tabelle
Teil 2
7-37

DS100: Identification overview (Length 100 Byte, read only)

Byte Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale
point (Bit)
0 Header; Val. 0x00 00 00 00 - COM15 COM10 - 32 -
4 Prüfdatum Schalter 98 ETU - PROFIBUS Time 64 -
12 Hersteller (SIEMENS oder SE&A) - COM15 COM10 20 x char 160 -
32 Gerätename (SENTRON WL oder SENTRON VL) - COM15 COM10 24 x char 192 -
56 Gerätefamilie (Fester Val. 0x03) - COM15 COM10 hex 8 -
57 Geratesubfamilie (Fester Val. 0x01) - COM15 COM10 hex 8 -
58 Geräteklasse (1=Offener Leistungsschalter; 2=Kom- - COM15 COM10 hex 8 -
paktleistungsschalter)
59 System (Fester Val. 0x06) - COM15 COM10 hex 8 -
60 Funktionsgruppe (Bit .0 für COM15;Bit .4 für COM10) - COM15 COM10 hex 8 -
61 Reserved - - - - 8 -
62 Kurzbezeichnung (PCB oder MCCB) - COM15 COM10 16 x char 128 -
78 HW Ausgabestand - COM15 - 4 x char 32 -
82 PROFIBUS Identnummer (0x00 00 80 C0) - COM15 COM10 hex 32 -
86 Reserved - - - - 16 -
88 Servicenummer (Unterer Teil der Schalter Identnum- - COM15 COM10 8 x char 64 -
mer)
96 FW Ausgabestand der PROFIBUS Module - COM15 COM10 4 x char 32 -
Der ösatz 100 dient der Identifikation im Überblick.
Tabelle
7-38

7-34

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 DS128: Parameter for the metering function and the ext. protective function (Length 103 Byte, read- and writeable) part 1
Byte Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale
point (Bit)
0 Header; Val. 0x00 00 00 00 - COM15 COM10 - 32 -
4 Spannungswandleranschluss primärseitig in Stern 162 Metering - Format (162) 1 -
oder Dreieck
5 Reserved - - - - 8 -
6 Nennspannung des Netzes (primärseitig) 164 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
8 Sekundärspannung des Wandlers 165 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
9 Length der Periode für die LangTimemittel- 166 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
Val.berechnung
10 Anzahl der Subperioden für die LangTimemittel- 167 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
Val.berechnung
11 Reserved - - - - 8 -
12 Untergrenze der Stromübertragung 372 ETU - unsigned int 16 0
14 Wirkleistung in Normalrichtung 141 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
16 Wirkleistung gegen Normalrichtung 143 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
18 VerzögerungsTime für Wirkleistung in Normalrich- 142 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
tung
19 VerzögerungsTime für Wirkleistung gegen Normal- 144 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
richtung
20 Normale Einspeiserichtung 145 Metering - Format (145) 1 -
21 Phasendrehsinn 146 Metering - Format (146) 1 -
22 Unterfrequenz 147 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
24 VerzögerungsTime für Überfrequenz 150 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
25 VerzögerungsTime für Unterfrequenz 148 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
26 Überfrequenz 149 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
28 Klirrfaktor des Stromes 158 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
29 VerzögerungsTime für Klirrfaktors des Stromes 159 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
30 Klirrfaktor der Spannung 160 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
31 VerzögerungsTime des Klirrfaktors der Spannung 161 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
32 Unsymmetrie Spannung 151 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
33 VerzögerungsTime für Unsymmetrie Spannung 152 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
34 Unterspannung 153 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
36 Überspannung 155 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
38 VerzögerungsTime für Unterspannung 154 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
39 VerzögerungsTime für Überspannung 156 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
40 Reserved - - - - 8 -
41 Unsymmetrie Strom 139 Metering ETU unsigned char 8 0
42 VerzögerungsTime für Unsymmetrie Strom 140 Metering ETU unsigned char 8 0
43 Reserved - - - - 8 -
44 Überlast Voralarm (nur VL) 369 - ETU unsigned int 16 0
46 Belegung des konfig. dig. Ausgangsmoduls 129 konf. DO - Format (129) 168 -
67 Reserved - - - - 24 -
Über den ösatz 128 können die Parameter der Messfunktion und der erweiterten Schutzfunktion ausgelesen, aber auch einge-
Tabelle
stellt werden. content ist auch die Belegung des konfigurierbaren digitalen Ausgangsmoduls. Teil 1
7-39

7-35

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 DS128: Parameter for the metering function and the ext. protective function (Length 103 Byte, read- and writeable) part 2
Byte Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale
point (Bit)
70 Property for Byte 4 - Metering - EB 8 -
71 Reserved - - - - 8 -
72 Property for Byte 6 - Metering - EB 8 -
73 Property for Byte 8 - Metering - EB 8 -
74 Property for Byte 9 - Metering - EB 8 -
75 Property for Byte 10 - Metering - EB 8 -
76 Reserved - - - - 8 -
77 Property for Byte 12 - ETU - EB 8 -
78 Property for Byte 14 - Metering - EB 8 -
79 Property for Byte 16 - Metering - EB 8 -
80 Property for Byte 18 - Metering - EB 8 -
81 Property for Byte 19 - Metering - EB 8 -
82 Property for Byte 20 - Metering - EB 8 -
83 Property for Byte 21 - Metering - EB 8 -
84 Property for Byte 22 - Metering - EB 8 -
85 Property for Byte 24 - Metering - EB 8 -
86 Property for Byte 25 - Metering - EB 8 -
87 Property for Byte 26 - Metering - EB 8 -
88 Property for Byte 28 - Metering - EB 8 -
89 Property for Byte 29 - Metering - EB 8 -
90 Property for Byte 30 - Metering - EB 8 -
91 Property for Byte 31 - Metering - EB 8 -
92 Property for Byte 32 - Metering - EB 8 -
93 Property for Byte 33 - Metering - EB 8 -
94 Property for Byte 34 - Metering - EB 8 -
95 Property for Byte 36 - Metering - EB 8 -
96 Property for Byte 38 - Metering - EB 8 -
97 Property for Byte 39 - Metering - EB 8 -
98 Property for Byte 40 - Metering - EB 8 -
99 Property for Byte 41 - Metering ETU EB 8 -
100 Property for Byte 42 - Metering ETU EB 8 -
101 Property for Byte 44 - - ETU EB 8 -
102 Property for Byte 46 - konf. DO - EB 8 -
Über den ösatz 128 können die Parameter der Messfunktion und der erweiterten Schutzfunktion ausgelesen, aber auch einge-
Tabelle
stellt werden. content ist auch die Belegung des konfigurierbaren digitalen Ausgangsmoduls. Teil 2
7-40

7-36

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 DS129: Parameter for the protective function (Length 139 Byte, read- and writeable) part 1
Byte Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale
point (Bit)
0 Header; Val. 0x00 00 00 00 - COM15 COM10 - 32 -
4 Überlastparameter IR Parametersatz A (PS A) 333 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0

6 Überlastschutz Neutralleiter IN PS A (WL) 334 ETU - unsigned int 16 0

8 Trägheitsgrad tR PS A 335 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 -1

10 Kurzschlussschutz unverzögert Ii PS A 336 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 1/ 0(VL)

12 Kurzschlussschutz verzögert Isd PS A 337 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 1/ 0(VL)

14 VerzögerungsTime Kurzschlussschutz tsd PS A 338 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 -3

16 Erdschlussschutz Ig1 PS A 339 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0

18 VerzögerungsTime Erdschluss tg1 PS A 340 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 -3

20 Erdschlussschutz Ig2 PS A 341 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0

22 VerzögerungsTime Erdschluss tg2 PS A 342 ETU ETU unsigned int 16 -3

24 I2t Kennlinie für verz. Kurzschlussschutz PS A 343 ETU ETU Format (343) 1 -

25 I2t Kennlinie für Erdschlussschutz PS A 344 ETU ETU Format (344) 1 -

26 I4t Kennlinie für den Überlastschutz PS A 345 ETU - Format (345) 1 -

27 Thermisches Gedächtnis PS A 346 ETU ETU Format (346) 1 -

28 Phasenausfallempfindlichkeit PS A 347 ETU - Format (347) 1 -
29 Reserved - - - - 8 -
30 AbkühlTimekonstante PS A 348 ETU - unsigned int 16 0
32 Überlastparameter IR Parametersatz B (PS B) 349 ETU - unsigned int 16 0

34 Überlastschutz Neutralleiter IN PS B 350 ETU - unsigned int 16 0

36 Trägheitsgrad tR PS B 351 ETU - unsigned int 16 -1

38 Kurzschlussschutz unverzögert Ii PS B 352 ETU - unsigned int 16 1

40 Kurzschlussschutz verzögert Isd PS B 353 ETU - unsigned int 16 1

42 VerzögerungsTime Kurzschlussschutz tsd PS B 354 ETU - unsigned int 16 -3

44 Erdschlussschutz Ig1 PS B 355 ETU - unsigned int 16 0

46 VerzögerungsTime Erdschluss tg1 PS B 356 ETU - unsigned int 16 -3

48 Erdschlussschutz Ig2 PS B 357 ETU - unsigned int 16 0

50 VerzögerungsTime Erdschluss tg2 PS B 358 ETU - unsigned int 16 -3

52 I2t Kennlinie für verz. Kurzschlussschutz PS B 359 ETU - Format (343) 1 -

53 I2t Kennlinie für Erdschlussschutz PS B 360 ETU - Format (344) 1 -

54 I4t Kennlinie für den Überlastschutz PS B 361 ETU - Format (345) 1 -

55 Thermisches Gedächtnis PS B 362 ETU - Format (346) 1 -

56 Phasenausfallempfindlichkeit PS B 363 ETU - Format (347) 1 -
57 Reserved - - - - 8 -
58 AbkühlTimekonstante PS B 364 ETU - unsigned int 16 0
60 Lastabwurf 367 ETU - unsigned int 16 0
62 Lastaufnahme 368 ETU - unsigned int 16 0
Im DS129 sind die Parameter der Schutzfunktion untergebracht sowie die Einstellungen für Lastabwurf und Lastaufnahme. Teil 1
Tabelle
7-41

7-37

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 DS129: Parameter for the protective function (Length 139 Byte, read- and writeable) part 2
Byte Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale
point (Bit)
64 VerzögerungsTime Lastabwurf/-aufnahme 366 ETU - unsigned char 8 0
65 Aktiver Parametersatz 370 ETU - Format (370) 1 -
66 Überlastschutz Neutralleiter IN (VL) 365 - ETU unsigned char 8 0

67 Reserved - - - - 8 -
68 Trägheitsklasse (nur SENTRON VL LCD ETU40M) 331 - ETU Format (331) 8 0
69 Erdschluß Wandlererfassungsart 410 ETU ETU Format (410) 2 -
70 Bemessungsstrom des externen g-Wandlers 102 ETU - unsigned int 16 0
72 Reserved - - - - 208 -
98 Property for Byte 70 - ETU - EB 8 -
99 Property for Byte 68 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
100 Property for Byte 4 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
101 Property for Byte 6 - ETU - EB 8 -
102 Property for Byte 8 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
103 Property for Byte 10 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
104 Property for Byte 12 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
105 Property for Byte 14 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
106 Property for Byte 16 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
107 Property for Byte 18 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
108 Property for Byte 20 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
109 Property for Byte 22 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
110 Property for Byte 24 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
111 Property for Byte 25 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
112 Property for Byte 26 - ETU - EB 8 -
113 Property for Byte 27 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
114 Property for Byte 28 - ETU - EB 8 -
115 Property for Byte 30 - ETU - EB 8 -
116 Property for Byte 32 - ETU - EB 8 -
117 Property for Byte 34 - ETU - EB 8 -
118 Property for Byte 36 - ETU - EB 8 -
119 Property for Byte 38 - ETU - EB 8 -
120 Property for Byte 40 - ETU - EB 8 -
121 Property for Byte 42 - ETU - EB 8 -
122 Property for Byte 44 - ETU - EB 8 -
123 Property for Byte 46 - ETU - EB 8 -
124 Property for Byte 48 - ETU - EB 8 -
125 Property for Byte 50 - ETU - EB 8 -
126 Property for Byte 52 - ETU - EB 8 -
127 Property for Byte 53 - ETU - EB 8 -
128 Property for Byte 54 - ETU - EB 8 -
Im DS129 sind die Parameter der Schutzfunktion untergebracht sowie die Einstellungen für Lastabwurf und Lastaufnahme. Teil 2
Tabelle
7-42

7-38

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 DS129: Parameter for the protective function (Length 139 Byte, read- and writeable) part 3
Byte Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale
point (Bit)
129 Property for Byte 55 - ETU - EB 8 -
130 Property for Byte 56 - ETU - EB 8 -
131 Property for Byte 58 - ETU - EB 8 -
132 Property for Byte 60 - ETU - EB 8 -
133 Property for Byte 62 - ETU - EB 8 -
134 Property for Byte 64 - ETU - EB 8 -
135 Property for Byte 65 - ETU - EB 8 -
136 Property for Byte 66 - - ETU EB 8 -
137 Reserved - - - - 8 -
138 Property for Byte 68 - - ETU EB 8 -
Im DS129 sind die Parameter der Schutzfunktion untergebracht sowie die Einstellungen für Lastabwurf und Lastaufnahme. Teil 3
Tabelle
7-43

7-39

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 DS130: Parameter for the setpoints (Length 148 Byte, read- and writeable) part 1
Byte Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale
point (Bit)
0 Header; Val. 0x00 00 00 00 - COM15 COM10 - 32 -
4 Wirkleistung in Normalrichtung 283 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
6 Wirkleistung gegen Normalrichtung 285 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
8 Leistungsfaktor kapazitiv 287 Metering - signed int 16 -3
10 Leistungsfaktor induktiv 289 Metering - signed int 16 -3
12 VerzögerungsTime für die Wirkleistung in Normal- 284 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
richtung
13 VerzögerungsTime für die Wirkleistung gegen Nor- 286 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
malrichtung
14 VerzögerungsTime für Leistungsfaktor kapazitiv 288 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
15 VerzögerungsTime für Leistungsfaktor induktiv 290 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
16 Überfrequenz 303 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
17 VerzögerungsTime für die Überfrequenz 304 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
18 Unterfrequenz 305 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
19 VerzögerungsTime für die Unterfrequenz 306 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
20 Klirrfaktor Strom 319 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
21 VerzögerungsTime für den Klirrfaktor Strom 320 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
22 Klirrfaktor Spannung 321 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
23 VerzögerungsTime für den Klirrfaktor Spannung 322 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
24 Scheitelfaktor 323 Metering - unsigned int 16 -2
26 Formfaktor 325 Metering - unsigned int 16 -2
28 VerzögerungsTime für den Scheitelfaktor 324 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
29 VerzögerungsTime für den Formfaktor 326 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
30 LangTimemittelVal. Wirkleistung 291 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
32 LangTimemittelVal. Scheinleistung 293 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
34 VerzögerungsTime für den LangTimemittelVal. der 292 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
Wirkleistung
35 VerzögerungsTime für den LangTimemittelVal. der 294 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
Scheinleistung
36 LangTimemittelVal. Blindleistung 295 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
38 Blindleistung in Normalrichtung 297 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
40 VerzögerungsTime für den LangTimemittelVal. der 296 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
Blindleistung
41 VerzögerungsTime für die Blindleistung in Normal- 298 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
richtung
42 Blindleistung gegen Normalrichtung 299 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
44 Scheinleistung 301 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
46 VerzögerungsTime für die Blindleistung gegen Nor- 300 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
malrichtung
47 VerzögerungsTime für die Scheinleistung 302 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
48 Überstrom 267 Metering ETU unsigned int 16 0
Die Parameter zur Generierung von SchwellVal.warnungen können über den DS130 ausgelesen und verändert werden. Teil 1
Tabelle
7-44

7-40

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 DS130: Parameter for the setpoints (Length 148 Byte, read- and writeable) part 2
Byte Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale
point (Bit)
50 Strom, der gegen Erde fließt 269 Metering ETU unsigned int 16 0
52 Überstrom im Neutralleiter 271 Metering ETU unsigned int 16 0
54 LangTimemittelVal. des Stromes 275 Metering ETU unsigned int 16 0
56 VerzögerungsTime für Überstrom 268 Metering ETU unsigned char 8 0
57 erzögerungsTime des Stromes, der gegen Erde fließt 270 Metering ETU unsigned char 8 0
58 VerzögerungsTime für Überstrom im Neutralleiter 272 Metering ETU unsigned char 8 0
59 Phasenunsymmetrie Strom 273 Metering ETU unsigned char 8 0
60 VerzögerungsTime für Phasenunsym. Strom 274 Metering ETU unsigned char 8 0
61 VerzögerungsTime für den des Stromes 276 Metering ETU unsigned char 8 0
62 Unterspannung 277 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
64 VerzögerungsTime für die Unterspannung 278 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
65 Phasenunsymmetrie Spannung 279 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
66 VerzögerungsTime für Phasenunsym. Spannung 280 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
67 Reserved - - - - 8 -
68 Überspannung 281 Metering - unsigned int 16 0
70 VerzögerungsTime für die Überspannung 282 Metering - unsigned char 8 0
71 Reserved - - - - 232 -
100 Property for Byte 4 - Metering - EB 8 -
101 Property for Byte 6 - Metering - EB 8 -
102 Property for Byte 8 - Metering - EB 8 -
103 Property for Byte 10 - Metering - EB 8 -
104 Property for Byte 12 - Metering - EB 8 -
105 Property for Byte 13 - Metering - EB 8 -
106 Property for Byte 14 - Metering - EB 8 -
107 Property for Byte 15 - Metering - EB 8 -
108 Property for Byte 16 - Metering - EB 8 -
109 Property for Byte 17 - Metering - EB 8 -
110 Property for Byte 18 - Metering - EB 8 -
111 Property for Byte 19 - Metering - EB 8 -
112 Property for Byte 20 - Metering - EB 8 -
113 Property for Byte 21 - Metering - EB 8 -
114 Property for Byte 22 - Metering - EB 8 -
115 Property for Byte 23 - Metering - EB 8 -
116 Property for Byte 24 - Metering - EB 8 -
117 Property for Byte 26 - Metering - EB 8 -
118 Property for Byte 28 - Metering - EB 8 -
119 Property for Byte 29 - Metering - EB 8 -
120 Property for Byte 30 - Metering - EB 8 -
Die Parameter zur Generierung von SchwellVal.warnungen können über den DS130 ausgelesen und verändert werden. Teil 2
Tabelle
7-45

7-41

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 DS130: Parameter for the setpoints (Length 148 Byte, read- and writeable) part 3
Byte Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale
point (Bit)
121 Property for Byte 32 - Metering - EB 8 -
122 Property for Byte 34 - Metering - EB 8 -
123 Property for Byte 35 - Metering - EB 8 -
124 Property for Byte 36 - Metering - EB 8 -
125 Property for Byte 38 - Metering - EB 8 -
126 Property for Byte 40 - Metering - EB 8 -
127 Property for Byte 41 - Metering - EB 8 -
128 Property for Byte 42 - Metering - EB 8 -
129 Property for Byte 44 - Metering - EB 8 -
130 Property for Byte 46 - Metering - EB 8 -
131 Property for Byte 47 - Metering - EB 8 -
132 Property for Byte 48 - Metering ETU EB 8 -
133 Property for Byte 50 - Metering ETU EB 8 -
134 Property for Byte 52 - Metering ETU EB 8 -
135 Property for Byte 54 - Metering ETU EB 8 -
136 Property for Byte 56 - Metering ETU EB 8 -
137 Property for Byte 57 - Metering ETU EB 8 -
138 Property for Byte 58 - Metering ETU EB 8 -
139 Property for Byte 59 - Metering ETU EB 8 -
140 Property for Byte 60 - Metering ETU EB 8 -
141 Property for Byte 61 - Metering ETU EB 8 -
142 Property for Byte 62 - Metering - EB 8 -
143 Property for Byte 64 - Metering - EB 8 -
144 Property for Byte 65 - Metering - EB 8 -
145 Property for Byte 66 - Metering - EB 8 -
146 Property for Byte 68 - - - EB 8 -
147 Property for Byte 70 - Metering - EB 8 -
Die Parameter zur Generierung von SchwellVal.warnungen können über den DS130 ausgelesen und verändert werden. Teil 3
Tabelle
7-46

7-42

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 DS131: Parameter to activate/deactivate parameters for the ext. protective function and setpoints (Length 70 Byte, read- and
writeable) part 1
Byte Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale
point (Bit)
0 Header; Val. 0x00 00 00 00 - COM15 COM10 - 32 -
4 Property for DS129.4 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
5 Property for DS129.6 - ETU - EB 8 -
6 Property for DS129.10 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
7 Property for DS129.12 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
8 Property for DS129.16 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
9 Property for DS129.20 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
10 Property for DS129.32 - ETU - EB 8 -
11 Property for DS129.34 - ETU - EB 8 -
12 Property for DS129.38 - ETU - EB 8 -
13 Property for DS129.40 - ETU - EB 8 -
14 Property for DS129.44 - ETU - EB 8 -
15 Property for DS129.48 - ETU - EB 8 -
16 Property for DS128.14 - Metering - EB 8 -
17 Property for DS128.16 - Metering - EB 8 -
18 Property for DS128.21 - Metering - EB 8 -
19 Property for DS128.22 - Metering - EB 8 -
20 Property for DS128.26 - Metering - EB 8 -
21 Property for DS128.28 - Metering - EB 8 -
22 Property for DS128.30 - Metering - EB 8 -
23 Property for DS128.32 - Metering - EB 8 -
24 Property for DS128.34 - Metering - EB 8 -
25 Property for DS128.36 - Metering - EB 8 -
26 Property for DS128.41 - Metering - EB 8 -
27 Property for DS130.4 - Metering - EB 8 -
28 Property for DS130.6 - Metering - EB 8 -
29 Property for DS130.8 - Metering - EB 8 -
30 Property for DS130.10 - Metering - EB 8 -
31 Property for DS130.16 - Metering - EB 8 -
32 Property for DS130.18 - Metering - EB 8 -
33 Property for DS130.20 - Metering - EB 8 -
34 Property for DS130.22 - Metering - EB 8 -
35 Property for DS130.24 - Metering - EB 8 -
36 Property for DS130.26 - Metering - EB 8 -
37 Property for DS130.30 - Metering - EB 8 -
38 Property for DS130.32 - Metering - EB 8 -
39 Property for DS130.36 - Metering - EB 8 -
40 Property for DS130.38 - Metering - EB 8 -
Über die Eigenschaftsbytes im DS131 können die Parameter der Schutzfunktion, der erweiterten Schutzfunktion und der Schwell-
Tabelle
Val.parameter ein- bzw. ausgeschaltet werden. Teil 1
7-47

7-43

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 DS131: Parameter to activate/deactivate parameters for the ext. protective function and setpoints (Length 70 Byte, read- and
writeable) part 2
Byte Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale
point (Bit)
41 Property for DS130.42 - Metering - EB 8 -
42 Property for DS130.44 - Metering - EB 8 -
43 Property for DS130.48 - Metering - EB 8 -
44 Property for DS130.50 - Metering - EB 8 -
45 Property for DS130.52 - Metering - EB 8 -
46 Property for DS130.54 - Metering - EB 8 -
47 Property for DS130.59 - Metering - EB 8 -
48 Property for DS130.62 - Metering - EB 8 -
49 Property for DS130.65 - Metering - EB 8 -
50 Property for DS130.68 - Metering - EB 8 -
51 Property for DS128.44 - - ETU EB 8 -
52 Property for DS129.27 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
53 Reserved - - - - 8 -
54 Property for DS97.45 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
55 Reserved - - - - 120 -
Über die Eigenschaftsbytes im DS131 können die Parameter der Schutzfunktion, der erweiterten Schutzfunktion und der Schwell-
Tabelle
Val.parameter ein- bzw. ausgeschaltet werden. Teil 2
7-48

7-44

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 DS160: Parameter for the communication (Length 77 Byte, read- and writeable)
Byte Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale
point (Bit)
0 Header; Val. 0x00 00 00 00 - COM15 COM10 - 32 -
4 Reserved - - - - 8 -
5 PROFIBUS Adresse 5 COM15 COM10 unsigned char 8 0
6 Basistyp der PROFIBUS öübertragung 6 COM15 COM10 Hex 2 -
7 Reserved - - - - 8 -
8 ö im zyklischen Profil des PROFIBUS 7 COM15 COM10 Format (7) 224 -
36 Reserved - - - - 48 -
42 IP Adresse des BDA/BDA Plus 10 BDA - Format (10) 40 -
48 Reserved - - - - 176 -
70 Reserved - - - - 8 -
71 Property for Byte 5 - COM15 COM10 EB 8 -
72 Property for Byte 6 - COM15 COM10 EB 8 -
73 Reserved - - - EB 8 -
74 Property for Byte 8 - COM15 COM10 EB 8 -
75 Reserved - - - EB 8 -
76 Property for Byte 42 - BDA - EB 8 -
Im ösatz 160 sind die Parameter für die Kommunikation hinterlegt. Diese können darüber ausgelesen, aber auch eingestellt wer-
Tabelle
den.
7-49

DS162: Device configuration (Length 75 Byte, read only)

Byte Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale
point (Bit)
0 Header; Val. 0x00 00 00 00 - COM15 COM10 - 32 -
4 Identnummer des COM15/COM10 91 COM15 COM10 16 x char 128 -
20 Bestellnummer Leistungsschalter (beim SENTRON VL 103 ETU ETU Format (103) 160 -
ist hier d. Bestellnummer des Auslöser)
40 Typ (Messfunktion, Messfunktion Plus) 138 Metering - Format (138) 8 -
41 Typ des Auslöser 412 ETU ETU Format (412) 5 -
42 Reserved - - - - 224 -
70 Property for Byte 4 - COM15 COM10 EB 8 -
71 Property for Byte 20 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
72 Reserved - - - EB 8 -
73 Property for Byte 41 - ETU ETU EB 8 -
74 Reserved - - - EB 8 -
Über die Gerätekonfiguration kann ausgelesen werden, welcher Leistungsschalter aktuell angeschlossen ist.
Tabelle
7-50

7-45

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 DS165: Identification comment (Length 194 Byte, read- and writeable)
Byte Description Data Source WL Source VL Format Length Scale
point (Bit)
0 Header; Val. 0x00 00 00 00 - COM15 COM10 - 32 -
4 Anwendertext (frei editierbar) 20 COM15 - 64 x char 512 -
68 Anlagenkennzeichen (frei editierbar) 21 COM15 - 64 x char 512 -
132 Datum (frei editierbar) 22 COM15 - Time 64 -
140 Autor (frei editierbar) 23 COM15 - 30 x char 240 -
170 Reserved - - - - 160 -
190 Property for Byte 4 - COM15 - EB 8 -
191 Property for Byte 68 COM15 - EB 8 -
192 Property for Byte 132 COM15 - EB 8 -
193 Property for Byte 140 COM15 - EB 8 -
Im ösatz 165 können anwenderspezifische Texte wie Kommentar, Anlagenkennzeichen, Datum und Autor im SENTRON Leistungs-
Tabelle
schalter hinterlegt werden.
7-51

7-46

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Data Dictionary
Common and special data formats

In den vorangegangenen Seiten wurden alle verfügbaren Datenpunkte be- Allgemeine Datenformate

schrieben und in welchem Datensatz sie über den PROFIBUS übertragen Viele Datenpunkte besitzen eine Daten-
länge von mehr als einem Byte. In die-
werden. In der Spalte „Format“ ist dabei erklärt, welcher Datentyp sich da- sem Fall können die Zahlen je nach Pro-
zessortyp, für den das Format
hinter verbirgt und wie dieser Inhalt zu interpretieren ist. Zu unterscheiden entwickelt wurde, entweder im Litt-
sind hierbei allgemein gültige Formate und Spezialformate, die meist binär le-Endian-Format (Intel) oder im Big-En-
dian-Format (Motorola) abgelegt wer-
codiert zu verstehen sind. den. Im Big-Endian-Format steht das
höherwertige Byte lesefreundlich vor
dem niederwertigen Byte, bei Intel sind
Format Length Sign Value rang Used for...
in Byte without scale beide Bytes vertauscht.

unsigned int 2 0...65535 Metering values, parameter Generell werden alle Daten, die über
den PROFIBUS kommunziert werden,
signed int 2 -32678...32767 signed metering values
im Motorola- (Big-Endian) Format
1 0...255 Metering values with smal-
unsigned char übertragen.
ler range
Das Format unsigned int wird for allem
char 1 0...255 ASCII code
zur Übertragung von Parameter und
4 0...4294967295 Metering values and mainte-
Messwerte sowie Statistikinformatio-
unsigned long nance information with a
huge range nen verwendet. Reicht der Wertebe-
reich nicht aus, wird eine Scale ange-
Die verwendeten Standardformate mit ihren Val.ebereichen und Verwendungs-
Tabelle wandt.
zwecken sind hier aufgelistet.
7-52
Um Messwerte zu übertragen, die auch
negativ sein können (z.B. Leistungsfak-
toren), wird das Format signed int ver-
wendet.
Ist der Wertebereich eines Parameters
oder eines Messwertes stark einge-
schränkt (z.B. Phasenunsymmetrie von
0 bis 50%), dann reicht der Datentyp
unsigned char vollständig aus.
Über den Datentyp char werden Text-
elemente zusammengesetzt, die aus
ASCII Zeichen bestehen.
Reicht der Wert.ebereich nicht aus, wird
auf den Datentyp unsigned long zu-
rückgegegriffen. Dieser wird z.B. beim
Betriebsstundenzähler verwendet.
Wäre dafür unsigned int verwendet
worden, würde der Betriebsstunden-
zähler nach siebeneinhalb Jahren über-
laufen.
Das Format hex ist immer dort angege-
Wenn ö abgelegt werden, die Lengthr als ein Byte sind, dann werden die Bytes im ben, wo eine Aneinanderreihung von
Grafik
Motorola Format (Big-Endian) abgelegt. binären Informationen vorliegt, z.B. bei
7-1
der Übertragung der Zustände an den

7-47

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Eingängen des binären Eingangsmoduls Spezielle Datenformate
Format (7) Data in cyclic telegram
vorliegt. Es wird aber auch verwendet, Spezielle Datenformate werden dort
wenn Zahlen im Hexadezimalsystem Byte Bit Description
verwendet, wo die unflexiblen Stan-
übertragen werden. dardformate nicht eingesetzt werden - Belegung (Data pointnum-
0 mer) des 1. öblocks im zykli-
Eine Description des Formats der Eigen- können. Die speziellen Datenformate schen Telegramm
schaftsbytes EB ist bereits im Kapitel 4 werden z.B. bei binär verschlüsselten
2 - entsprechend
beschrieben worden. oder bei zusammengesetzten Daten-
punkten benutzt. 4 - entsprechend
Für die Kommunikation von Timestem-
peln wird das S7 kompatible Timefor- Ist bei einem Datenpunkt ein spezielles 6 - entsprechend
mat (DATE_AND_TIME) benutzt. Eine Datenformat verwendet worden, so ist 8 - entsprechend
Ausnahme hier bildet der Timestempel dies im ersten und zweiten Teil in die- 10 - entsprechend
im DS100, der nach der PROFIBUS Norm sem Kapitel in der Format-Spalte mit
12 - entsprechend
abgebildet ist. Format (X) hinterlegt. Das X steht dort
als Stellvertreter für eine laufende Num- 14 - entsprechend

Format Time mer der verwendeten speziellen Daten- 16 - entsprechend

formate, die nachfolgend beschrieben 18 - entsprechend
Byte Bit Description
sind. In den allermeisten Fällen stimmt
0 - Jahr 20 - entsprechend
das X im Format mit der Datenpunkt-
1 - Monat nummer überein, um die Suche zu ver- 22 - entsprechend

2 - Tag einfachen. 24 entsprechend

3 - Stunde Bei Bitinterpretationen ist die Bedeu- Belegung (Data pointnum-

tung immer bei einem High aktiven si- 26 - mer) des 14. öblocks im
4 - Minute zyklischen Telegramm
gnal zu sehen.
5 - Sekunde Format (7) für die Datem im
Tabelle
- NiederVal.ige Ziffern von zyklischen Profil des PROFIBUS
6 7-55
Millisekunden
4-7 HöherVal.ige Ziffern von Mil-
7
lisekunden (4MSB) Format (10) IP-Adresse BDA
0-3 Wochentag (1=Sonn- Byte Bit Description
7
tag...7=Samstag)
unsigned int:
Alle Timestempel werden im 0 -
Tabelle 1. Teil IP-Adresse X.x.x.x
diesem Format übertragen.
7-53
unsigned int:
1 -
2. Teil IP-Adresse x.X.x.x
unsigned int:
Format PROFIBUS Time (DS100.4) 2 -
3. Teil IP-Adresse x.x.X.x
Byte Bit Description unsigned int:
3 -
HöherVal.ige Ziffern von Mil- 4. Teil IP-Adresse x.x.x.X
0 -
lisekunden 4 - Reserved
NiederVal.ige Ziffern von IP-Adressen bestehen aus vier
1 - Tabelle
Millisekunden Zahlen von 0 bis 255 getrennt
7-56
2 - Minute durch jeweils eine ät.

3 0-4 Stunde
3 7 1=SommerTime; 0=Winterz. Format (14) PROFIBUS Write Enable

4 0-4 Tag im Monat (1-31) Byte Bit Description

5-7 Wochentag (1=Mon- 0 = Schreibschutz aktiv

4 0 0
tag...7=Sonntag) 1 = kein Schreibschutz aktiv

5 - Monat Ein HW-Eingang an COM15 und

Tabelle
COM10 deaktiviert den Schreib-
6 - Jahr (02 = 2002) 7-57
schutz über PROFIBUS
7 - Reserved
Dieses Timeformat ist konform
Tabelle
zum PROFIBUS Timeformat
7-54

7-48

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Format (15) Triplog 23 - Reserved 0x00
Format (16) Eventlog
Byte Bit Description Byte Bit Description 24 - Timest. des 3. Ereignisses

0 - Zeitstempel der 1. Auslösung 32 - Reserved 0x00

0 - Timest. des 1. Ereignisses
8 - Reserved 0x00 33 - 3. Ereignis
8 - Reserved 0x00
Auslösegrund 1. Auslösung 1. Ereignis (Erstes Ereignis = 34 - Source der 3. Ereignisses
1 = Überlast kommend +; zweites Ereig- 35 - Reserved 0x00
2 = unverz. Kurzschluss nis = gehend - ), siehe 1 u. 2!
3 = verzög. Kurzschluss 36 - Timest. des 4. Ereignisses
1 = + Überlastwarnung
4 = Erdschluss 2 = - Überlastwarnung etc... 44 - Reserved 0x00
5 = Erw. Schutzfunktion 3 = Überlastwarnung N-Leit.
6 = Überlast N-Leiter 5 = Lastabwurfwarnung 45 - 4. Ereignis
20 = Unsymm. Strom 7 = Lastaufnahmemeldung 46 - Source der 4. Ereignisses
21 = Unsymm. Spannung 9 = Phasenunsymmetriewar.
9 - 47 - Reserved 0x00
22 = Wirkleist. in Normalr. 11 = Fehler im Auslöser
23 = Wirkl. gegen Normalr. 13 = Erschlusswarnung 48 - Timest. des 5. Ereignisses
24 = Überspannung 15 = Übertemperaturwarn.
25 = Unterspannung 20 = Schalter ein 56 - Reserved 0x00
26 = Überfrequenz 21 = Schalter aus 57 - 5. Ereignis
27 = Unterfrequenz 40 = SchwellVal.war. SW
28 = Klirrfaktor Strom 58 - Source der 5. Ereignisses
Strom
29 = Klirrfaktor Spannung 42 = SW Erdschluss 59 - Reserved 0x00
30 = Phasendrehsinn Änder. 44 = SW Überstrom N-Leiter
46 = SW Unsymmetrie Strom 60 - Timest. des 6. Ereignisses
Source der 1. Auslösung
10 - 14 = Messfunktion/M. Plus 48 = SW LangTimemittelVal. 68 - Reserved 0x00
25 = Auslöser Strom
69 - 6. Ereignis
50 = SW Unterspannung
11 - Reserved 0x00 9 -
52 = SW Unsymmetrie Span- 70 - Source der 6. Ereignisses
- Timestempel der 2. Auslö- nung
12 54 = SW Überspannung 71 - Reserved 0x00
sung
56 = SW LangTimemittelVal. 72 - Timest. des 7. Ereignisses
20 - Reserved 0x00 Wirkleistung
80 - Reserved 0x00
21 - Auslösegrund 2. Auslösung 58 = SW LangTimemittelVal.
Scheinleistung 81 - 7. Ereignis
22 - Source der 2. Auslösung 60 = SW LangTimemittelVal.
Blindleistung 82 - Source der 7. Ereignisses
23 - Reserved 0x00
62 = SW Blindl. in Normalr. 83 - Reserved 0x00
- Timestempel der 3. Auslö- 64 = SW Blindl. geg. Normal.
24 84 - Timest. des 8. Ereignisses
sung 66 = SW Scheinleistung
32 - Reserved 0x00 68 = SW Überfrequenz 92 - Reserved 0x00
70= SW Unterfrequenz
33 - Auslösegrund 3. Auslösung 72 = SW Unterleistungsfakt. 93 - 8. Ereignis

34 - Source der 3. Auslösung 74 = SW Überleistungsfaktor 94 - Source der 8. Ereignisses

76 = SW Klirrfaktor Strom
35 - Reserved 0x00 95 - Reserved 0x00
78 = SW Klirrfaktor Spann.
36 - Timstempel der 4. Auslösung 80= SW Scheitelfaktor 96 - Timest. des 9. Ereignisses
82 = SW Formfaktor
44 - Reserved 0x00 84 = SW Wirkl. in Normalr. 104 - Reserved 0x00

45 - Auslösegrund 4. Auslösung 86 = SW Wirkl. geg. Normal. 105 - 9. Ereignis

46 - Source der 4. Auslösung Source der 1. Ereignisses 106 - Source der 9. Ereignisses
10 - 14 = Messfunktion/M. Plus
47 - Reserved 0x00 25 = Auslöser 107 - Reserved 0x00

48 - Timstempel der 5. Auslösung 11 - Reserved 0x00 108 - Timest. des 10. Ereignisses

56 - Reserved 0x00 116 - Reserved 0x00

12 - Timest. des 2. Ereignisses
57 - Auslösegrund 5. Auslösung 117 - 10. Ereignis
20 - Reserved 0x00
58 - Source der 5. Auslösung 118 - Source der 10. Ereignisses
21 - 2. Ereignis
59 - Reserved 0x00 119 - Reserved 0x00
22 - Source der 2. Ereignisses
Das Auslösebuch enthält die Das Ereignisbuch enthält die
Tabelle Tabelle
letzten 5 Auslösungen mit letzten 10 Ereignisse mit Times-
7-58 7-59
Timestempel undSource. tempel

7-49

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Format (17) Status PROFIBUS-DP Format (24) Position in the frame Format (100) Frame size
Byte Bit Description Byte Val. Description Byte Val. Description
Kein zyklischer Dateverkehr 0 0 Trennstellung 0 1 Baugröße 1
0 0
mit Master Klasse 1
0 1 Betriebsstellung 0 2 Baugröße 2
COM1x hat keine gültige
0 1 0 2 Teststellung 0 3 Baugröße 3
PROFIBUS Adresse
0 3 Schalter nicht anwesend Je nach Schalternennstrom und
PROFIBUS Adresse kann Tabelle
Schaltleistungsklasse ergibt sich
0 2 nicht mehr verändert wer- Data point 24 gibt die Position 7-67
Tabelle eine Baugröße.
den des SENTRON WL im Einschub-
7-63
rahmen an.
Über den Status kann abgefragt
Tabelle
werdenn, ob eine zyklische Ver- Format (103) Order # CB
7-60
bindung besteht.
Format (88) c Modules Byte Bit Description
Byte Bit Description 0 - 3
Format (18) Control COM1x 0 0 COM15 1 - W
Byte Bit Description 0 1 Auslöser ETU 2 - L
0 2 Löscht die Wartungszähler 0 2 ZSS Modul 3 - Markt
Löscht die min./max. Tempe- 1 0 konfig. dig. Ausgangsmodul 4 - Baugröße
0 3
raturen
1 2 Dig. Ausgangsmodul #2 5/6 - Nennstrom
Löscht alle min./max Val.e
0 4 1 3 DIg. Eingangsmodul #2 7 - Trennstrich
ausser Temperatur
Synchronisiert die Uhr auf 1 4 Breaker Status Sensor BSS 8 - Schaltleistungsklasse
0 5
xx:30:00,000 1 5 Dig. Ausgangsmodul #1 Auslöser
Löscht den Inhalt des Aus- E = ETU45B ohne Display
0 6 1 6 Dig. Eingangsmodul #1
löse- und Ereignisbuches 9 - F = ETU45B mit Display
2 1 BDA oder BDA Plus J = ETU55B
Hebt die Sperre der N = ETU76B
0 7 DP-Adresse auf und setzt die 2 3 Grafikdisplay ETU76B
Adresse auf 126 Auslöser Zusatz
2 4 Analoges Ausgangsmodul #2
10 - B = ohne Erdschlussmodul
Darüber können einige Einstel- 2 5 Analoges Ausgangsmodul #1 G = mit Erdschlussmodul
Tabelle
lungen des Schalters verändert
7-61 2 6 Messfunktion oder M. Plus 11 - Polzahl
werden.
Data point 88 gibt Auskunft 12 - Art Hauptanschlüsse
Tabelle
über die am c ange-
7-64 13 - Trennstrich
Format (19) Ctrl. Outputs COM1x schlossenen Module.
14 - Antrieb
Byte Bit Description
15 - 1. Hilfauslöser
0 0 Benutzerausgang setzen Format (95) Market
16 - 2. Hilfsauslöser
0 1 Benutzerausgang rücksetzen Byte Val. Description
17 - Hilfsstromschalter
0 2 Schalter ausschalten 0 1 IEC
18 0 Option F02
0 3 Schalter einschalten 0 2 UL
18 2 Option F04
Status Benutzerausgang 0 3 ANSI
0 6
lesen 18 3 Option F05
Marktangabe, für die der Lei-
Status Benutzereingang Tabelle 18 6 Option F01
0 7 stungsschalter gebaut und
7-65
lesen (nur COM15) geprüft wurde. 18 7 Option F20 bis F22
Der Leistungsschalter kann
Tabelle 19 0 Option K01
damit z.B. ein- bzw. ausgeschal-
7-62
tet werden. Format (99) Breaking capacity 19 1 Option K10 bis K13
Byte Val. Description Über das Format der Bestell-
Tabelle
nummer kann der Schalter iden-
0 2 ECO Schaltvermögen N 7-68
tifiziert werden.
0 3 Standardschaltvermögen S
0 4 Hohes Schaltvermögen H
Die Schaltleistungsklasse gibt
Tabelle
die Höhe des max. Ausschalt-
7-66
stromes an.

7-50

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Format (107) Sum. of . I2t Values Format (121) DO control Outputs 0 0x15 Ausl: Erdschluss G

Byte Bit Description Byte Val. Description 0 0x16 Ausl: Überlast N-Leiter N

0 - Phase L1 (unsigned long) 0 0 Keine Aktion 0 0x17 Ausl: Phasenuns. Strom

4 - Phase L2 (unsigned long) 0 1 Ausgang 1 setzen („1“) 0 0x18 Ausl: Phasenuns. Spann.

8 - Phase L3 (unsigned long) 0 2 Ausgang 1 rücksetzen („0“) 0 0x19 Ausl: Unterfrequenz

12 - Phase N (unsigned long) 0 3 Ausgang 2 setzen („1“) 0 0x1A Ausl: Überfrequenz

Die Summe der abgeschalteten 0 4 Ausgang 2 rücksetzen („0“) 0 0x1B Ausl: Unterspannung
Tabelle
7-69 I2t Val.e je Phase im Format 0 5 Ausgang 3 setzen („1“) 0 0x1C Ausl: Überspannung
unsigned long
0 6 Ausgang 3 rücksetzen („0“) 0 0x1D Ausl: Wirkl. in Normalr.
0 7 Ausgang 4 setzen („1“) Ausl: Wirkleistung gegen
0 0x1E
Normalrichtung
Format (108) # of poles 0 8 Ausgang 4 rücksetzen („0“)
0 0x1F Ausl: Klirrfaktor Strom
Byte Val. Description 0 9 Ausgang 5 setzen („1“)
0 0x20 Ausl: Klirrfaktor Spannung
0 1 3 Pole 0 10 Ausgang 5 rücksetzen („0“)
Ausl: Umkehr Phasen-
0 2 4 Pole (mit N-Leiter) 0 11 Ausgang 6 setzen („1“) 0 0x21
drehsinn
Die Anzahl der Pole für den 0 12 Ausgang 6 rücksetzen („0“)
Tabelle 0 0x22 SchwellVal. SW: Überstrom
Hauptstromkreis, die geschützt
7-70 Forcemodus (Überschrei-
werden. 0 0x23 SW: Überstrom N-Leiter
0 13 ben der eigentlich gültigen
ö) ausschalten 0 0x24 SW: Überstrom Erdschluss

Format (111) Switch position DI Steuert die Ausgänge der digita- 0 0x25 SW: Phasenuns. Strom
Tabelle
len Ausgangsmodule mit Dreh-
Byte Val. Description 7-73 0 0x26 SW: Phasenuns. Spannung
kodierschalter.
Parametersatzumschal- 0 0x27 SW: LangTimem. Strom
0 1
tung (Modul #1) 0 0x28 SW: Unterspannung
Format (129) Conf. Output module
6 x dig. Eingänge (Modul 0 0x29 SW: Überspannung
0 2
#2) Byte Val. Description
0 0x2A SW: Klirrfaktor Strom
Die Schalterstellung des dig. 1. Ereignis auf dem 1.
Tabelle 0 -
Eingangsmoduls unterscheidet Ausgang 0 0x2B SW: Klirrfaktor Spannung
7-71
auch zwischen Modul 1 und 2. 0 0x2C SW: Scheitelfaktor
0 0x00 nicht belegt
0 0x01 Schalter ein 0 0x2D SW: Formfaktor
Format (119) Switch position DO 0 0x02 Schalter aus 0 0x2E SW: Unterfrequenz
Byte Val. Description 0 0x03 Federspeicher gespannt 0 0x2F SW: Überfrequenz
0 0x01 Modul #1 Trip unverzögert 0 0x04 Einschaltbereit 0 0x30 SW: Wirkl. in Normalricht.
0 0x02 Modul #1 Trip verz. 200ms 0 0x05 Sammelwarnung 0 0x31 SW: Wirkl. gegen Normalr.
0 0x03 Modul #1 Trip verz. 500 ms 0 0x06 Sammelausgelöstmeld. 0 0x32 SW: Scheinleistung
0 0x04 Modul #1 Trip verzögert 1s 0 0x07 DP Schreibschutz aktiv 0 0x33 SW: Blindl. in Normalr.
0 0x05 Modul #1 Trip verzögert 2s 0 0x08 DP Kommunikation OK 0 0x34 SW: Blindl. gegen Normalr.
Modul #2 Alarm 0 0x09 Warn: Überlast 0 0x35 SW: cos phi kapazitiv
0 0x06
unverzögert
0 0x0A Warn: Überlast N-Leiter 0 0x36 SW: cos phi induktiv
Modul #2 Alarm
0 0x07 0 0x0B Warn: Lastabwurf SW: LangTimemittelVal.
verzögert 200ms 0 0x37
Wirkleistung
Modul #2 Alarm 0 0x0C Warn: Erdschluss
0 0x08 SW: LangTimemittelVal.
verzögert 500 ms 0 0x0D Warn: Übertemperatur 0 0x38
Blindleistung
Modul #2 Alarm 0 0x0E Warn: µP-Fehler
0 0x09 SW: LangTimemittelVal.
verzögert 1s 0 0x39
0 0x0F Warn: Phasenuns. Strom Scheinleistung
Modul #2 Alarm
0 0x0A 0 0x10 Warn: Lastaufnahme 0 0x3A Triggerevent A eingetreten
verzögert 2s
Die Schalterstellung gibt an, 0 0x11 Ausl: Überlast L 0 0x3B Triggerevent B eingetreten
Tabelle
welcher Ausgabeblock mit wel- 0 0x12 Ausl: Verz. Kurzschluss I 0 0x3C Parametersatz A aktiv
7-72
cher Verzögerung selektiert ist.
0 0x13 Ausl: Unverz. Kurzschluss S 0 0x3D Parametersatz B aktiv

7-51

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 0 0x3E PROFIBUS Bit 1(#426) Format (145) Incoming direction Format (308) Setpoint warnings
0 0x3F PROFIBUS Bit 2 (#426) Byte Val. Description Byte Bit Description
0 0x40 PROFIBUS Bit 3 (#426) 0 0 Von Oben nach Unten 1 0 cos phi kapazitiv
0 0x41 PROFIBUS Bit 4 (#426) 0 1 Von Unten nach Oben 1 1 cos phi induktiv
0 0x42 PROFIBUS Bit 5 (#426) Das Vorzeichen von Wirk- und 1 2 Klirrfaktor Strom
Tabelle
Blindleistungen sind abhängig
0 0x43 PROFIBUS Bit 6 (#426) 7-76 1 3 Klirrfaktor Spannung
von der Einspeiserichtung.
1 - 2. Ereign. auf dem 1. Ausg. 1 4 Scheitelfaktor
2 - 3. Ereign. auf dem 1. Ausg. 1 5 Formfaktor
Format (146) Phase rotation
3 - 4. Ereign. auf dem 1. Ausg. 1 6 Wirkleistung in Normalricht.
Byte Val. Description
4 - 5. Ereign. auf dem 1. Ausg. 1 7 Wirkl. gegen Normalrichtung
0 0 L1 - L2 - L3
5 - 6. Ereign. auf dem 1. Ausg. 2 0 LangTimemittelVal. Wirkl.
0 1 L1 - L3 - L2 oder ähnliches
6 - 1. Ereign. auf dem 2. Ausg. 2 1 LangTimemittelVal. Scheinl.
Der Normalzustand des Phasen-
7 - 2. Ereign. auf dem 2. Ausg. Tabelle 2 2 LangTimemittelVal. Blindl.
drehsinns kann hierüber einge-
7-77
8 - 3. Ereign. auf dem 2. Ausg. stellt werden 2 3 Blindleistung in Normalricht.
9 - 4. Ereign. auf dem 2. Ausg. Blindleistung gegen Normal-
2 4
richtung
10 - 5. Ereign. auf dem 2. Ausg. Format (162) Voltage transformer
2 5 Scheinleistung
11 - 6. Ereign. auf dem 2. Ausg. Byte Val. Anschluss
2 6 Überfrequenz
12 - 1. Ereign. auf dem 3. Ausg. Spannungswandler ist pri-
0 0 märseitig in Dreieckschal- 2 7 Unterfrequenz
13 - 2. Ereign. auf dem 3. Ausg.
tung angeschlossen
3 0 Überstrom
14 - 3. Ereign. auf dem 3. Ausg.
Spannungswandler ist pri-
3 1 Überstrom Erdschluss
15 - 4. Ereign. auf dem 3. Ausg. 0 1 märseitig in Dreieckschal-
tung angeschlossen 3 2 Überstrom N-Leiter
16 - 5. Ereign. auf dem 3. Ausg.
Die Einstellung des Primäran- 3 3 Phasenunsymmetrie Strom
17 - 6. Ereign. auf dem 3. Ausg. Tabelle
schlusses hat auch Einfluss auf
7-78 3 4 LangTimemittelVal. Strom
18 - Ereignis auf dem 4. Ausg. die Spannungsmessgrößen.
3 5 Unterspannung
19 - Ereignis auf dem 5. Ausg.
Phasenunsymmetrie Span-
20 - Ereignis auf dem 6. Ausg. Format (307) Trips of the met. fct. 3 6
nung
Im 1. Ereignis des 1. Ausgangs Byte Val. Anschluss
Tabelle 3 7 Überspannung
ist exemplarisch die Belegung
7-74 0/1 0x0000 Keine Auslösung
für alle anderen erklärt. Zeigt die akutell anliegenden
Tabelle
Phasenunsymmetrie SchwellVal.warnungen an.
0/1 0x0001 7-80
Strom

Format (138) Type of metering funct. Phasenunsymmetrie

0/1 0x0002
Spannung
Byte Val. Description
0/1 0x0004 Wirkl. in Normalrichtung
0 0x00 Keine Messfunktion
0/1 0x0008 Wirkl. gegen Normalr.
0 0x02 Messfunktion
0/1 0x0040 Überspannung
0 0x03 Messfunktion Plus
0/1 0x0080 Unterspannung
Gibt an, welcher Typ der
Tabelle 0/1 0x0100 Überfrequenz
Messfunktion eingebaut ist.
7-75
0/1 0x0200 Unterfrequenz
0/1 0x0400 Klirrfaktor Strom
0/1 0x0800 Klirrfaktor Spannung
Änderung des Phasen-
0/1 0x1000
drehsinns
Zeigt den Inhalt der letzten Aus-
Tabelle
lösung durch die erweiterte
7-79
Schutzfunktion an.

7-52

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Format (309) Harmonics Format (331) Trip Class (VL only) Format (346) Therm. memory
Byte Bit Description Byte Val. Description Byte Val. Description
1. Harmonische Strom: 3 Sekunden Verzögerung Thermisches Gedächtnis
0 - 0 5 0 0
Exponent (signed char) @ 7,2 x Nennstrom ist ausgeschaltet
1. Harmonische Strom: 6 Sekunden Verzögerung Thermisches Gedächtnis
1 - 0 10 0 1
Val. (unsigned char) @ 7,2 x Nennstrom ist eingeschaltet
1. Harmonische Spannung: 9 Sekunden Verzögerung Hierüber kann das thermische
2 - 0 15 Tabelle
Exponent (signed char) @ 7,2 x Nennstrom Gedächtnis ein- und ausge-
7-87
schaltet werden.
1. Harmonische Spannung: 12 Sekunden Verzögerung
3 - 0 20
Val. (unsigned char) @ 7,2 x Nennstrom
2. Harmonische Strom: 18 Sekunden Verzögerung Format (347) Phase sentitivity
4 - 0 30
Exponent (signed char) @ 7,2 x Nennstrom
Byte Val. Description
2. Harmonische Strom: Der Val. der Trip Class ist auf
5 - Tabelle Phasenausfallempfindlich-
Val. (unsigned char) den angeschlossenen Motor 0 0
7-83 keit ist ausgeschaltet
angepasst.
2. Harmonische Spannung:
6 - Phasenausfallempfindlich-
Exponent (signed char) 0 1
keit ist eingeschaltet
2. Harmonische Spannung: Format (343) I 2t for S
7 - Hierüber kann die Phasenaus-
Val. (unsigned char) Tabelle
Byte Val. Description fallempfindlichkeit ein- und aus-
... ... ... 7-88
geschaltet werden.
I2t Kennlinie für den verzö-
29. Harmonische Strom: 0 0
112 - gerten Kurzschlussschutz
Exponent (signed char)
ausgeschaltet
Format (370) Active parameterset
29. Harmonische Strom:
113 - I2t Kennlinie für den verzö-
Val. (unsigned char) Byte Val. Description
0 1 gerten Kurzschlussschutz
29. Harmonische Spannung: eingeschaltet 0 0 Parametersatz A ist aktiv
114 -
Exponent (signed char) 0 1 Parametersatz Bist aktiv
Tabelle Hierüber kann die I2t Kennlinie
29. Harmonische Spannung: ein- und ausgeschaltet werden.
115 - 7-84 Gibt an, welcher der Parame-
Val. (unsigned char) Tabelle
tersätze aktiv geschaltet ist.
7-89
Zur Berechung muss der Val. mit
Tabelle
dem vorzeichenbehafteten
7-81
Exponent multipliziert werden. Format (344) I 2t for G
Byte Val. Description Format (373) Phasen number
Byte Val. Description
I2t Kennlinie für den Erd-
Format (328) Status of the breaker 0 0 schlussschutz ausgeschal- 0 0 Phase L1
Byte Bit Description tet
0 1 Phase L2
0 0 Schalter ist aus I2t Kennlinie für den Erd-
0 2 Phase L3
0 1 schlussschutz eingeschal-
0 1 Schalter ist ein tet 0 3 N-Leiter
Schalter hat ausgelöst (Aus- 2 0 4 Erdschluss
0 2 Tabelle Hierüber kann die I t Kennlinie
gelöstmeldeschalter)
7-85 ein- und ausgeschaltet werden. Gibt die Phasennummer der
0 3 Schalter ist einschaltbereit Tabelle
hächstbel. Phase und die Phase
7-90
0 4 Federspeicher ist gespannt der Auslösung an.

Schalter am 1. Hilfsauslöser Format (345) I 4t for L

0 5
ist betätigt
Byte Val. Description
Schalter am 2. Hilfsauslöser
0 6 I4t Kennlinie für den Über-
ist betätigt 0 0
lastschutz ausgeschaltet
Überträgt die ö, die der BSS über
Tabelle
Mikroschalter eingesammelt I4t Kennlinie für den Über-
7-82 0 1
hat. lastschutz eingeschaltet

Tabelle Hierüber kann die I4t Kennlinie

7-86 ein- und ausgeschaltet werden.

7-53

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Format (401) Active Trip of the ETU Format (406) Control the trip unit Format (412) Type of trip unit
Byte Val. Description Byte Val. Anschluss Byte Val. Description
0 0x00 Keine Auslösung Letzte Auslösemeldung 0 4 ETU45B
0/1 0x0002
im Auslöser löschen
0 0x01 Überlast (L) 0 5 ETU45B mit Display
Zähler und Statistikinfor-
0 0x02 Unverzög. Kurzschluss (I) 0 6 ETU45B mit Erdschluss
0/1 0x0022 mationen des Auslösers
KurzTimeverzögerter Kurz- zurücksetzen ETU45B mit Display und
0 0x04 0 7
schluss (S) Erdschluss
Über diesen Data point können
Tabelle
0 0x08 Erdschluss (G) u.a. die Statistikinformationen 0 8 ETU55B
7-94
zurückgesetzt werden.
Auslösung durch die erwei- 0 9 ETU55B mit Erdschluss
0 0x10 terte Schutzfunktion (in
0 13 ETU76B
der Messfunktion)
Format (410) Earth fault settings 0 14 ETU76B mit Erdschluss
0 0x20 Überlast im N-Leiter (N)
Byte Val. Description Teilt mit, welcher Auslöser mit
Zeigt die letzte, nicht quittierte Tabelle
Tabelle Erfassung des Stromes welcher Ausstattung Verwen-
Auslösung des Auslöser an. 7-97
7-91 0 0 gegen Erde über einen dung findet.
externen Wandler
Berechung des Stromes
Format (426) PROFIBUS Bits
Format (402) Active warnings ETU 0 1 gegen Erde durch eine vek-
torielle Summenbildung Byte Bit Description
Byte Val. Description
Erfassung des Stromes 0 0 PROFIBUS Bit 1
Voreilende Überlastauslö-
0 0 gegen Erde über die vekto-
sewarnung 0 1 PROFIBUS Bit 2
rielle Summenbildung
0 2
1 0 Überlast (Warnung) und über einen 0 2 PROFIBUS Bit 3
externen Wandler (Auslö-
1 1 Überlast N-Leiter 0 3 PROFIBUS Bit 4
sung)
1 2 Lastabwurf 0 4 PROFIBUS Bit 5
Über den Parameter wird die Art
Tabelle
1 3 Lastaufnahme der Erdschlusserfassung einge- 0 5 PROFIBUS Bit 6
7-95
stellt.
1 4 Phasenunsymmetrie Strom Über diese Bits können Signale
Tabelle
vom PROFIBUS auf das konfig.
1 5 µP Fehler 7-98
Ausgangsmodul gelegt werden.
1 6 Erdschlusswarnung Format (411) N-transformer

1 7 Übertemperatur Byte Val. Description

Über den Data point 402 kom- Kein Wandler im N-Leiter

Tabelle 0 0
muniziert der Auslöser die aktu- vorhanden
7-92
ell anliegenden Warnungen. Es ist ein Wandler im N-Lei-
0 1
ter vorhanden
Gibt Auskunft darüber, ob ein
Format (405) Status main contacts Tabelle
N-Wandler angeschlossen ist.
7-96
Byte Val. Description
Hauptkontakte brauchen
noch nicht gewartet wer-
den
0 0 (Hinweis: Nach jeder Aus-
lösung müssen trotzdem
die Hauptkontakte über-
prüft werden!)
Wartung der Hauptkon-
0 1
takte vorbereiten
Sofortige Sichtprüfung der
0 2 Hauptkontakte durchfüh-
ren.
Der Kontaktzustand wird empiri-
Tabelle
sche aus den Wartungsinforma-
7-93
tionen berechnet.

7-54

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com

 Siemens AG

Automation and Drives

Low voltage switch gear for energy distribution

www.siemens.com/lowvoltage

PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com